AS-Interface manual

Tips and tricks for users

7390566_03_UK

2012-09

AC0351

Edition 2.2

Frank Hinnah
Bernd Schneider

ifm AS-Interface manual tips and tricks for users edition 2.1

2012-09-26

Contents

Contents
1

On this manual
1.1
1.2
1.3
1.4

Preface............................................................................................................................7
What do the symbols and formats mean? ......................................................................8
How is this documentation structured?...........................................................................9
History of the instructions .............................................................................................10

Safety instructions
2.1
2.2
2.3

11

Important!......................................................................................................................11
What previous knowledge is required?.........................................................................12
Tampering with the unit ................................................................................................12

System description
3.1
3.2
3.2.1
3.2.2
3.2.3
3.2.4
3.3
3.4
3.5

AS-i topology.................................................................................................................13
AS-i flat cable overview ................................................................................................14
Flat cable AC4000 + AC4002 ..................................................................................15
Flat cable AC4001 + AC4006 ..................................................................................17
Flat cable AC4003 + AC4004 ..................................................................................19
Flat cable AC4007 + AC4008 ..................................................................................21
Sealing the AS-i flat cable end......................................................................................23
Information about AS-i ..................................................................................................23
Overview of the ifm AS-i device families.......................................................................24

Device descriptions
4.1
4.1.1
4.1.2
4.1.3
4.1.4
4.1.5
4.2
4.2.1
4.2.2
4.2.3
4.2.4
4.2.5
4.2.6
4.3
4.3.1
4.3.2
4.3.3
4.4
4.4.1
4.4.2
4.4.3

13

29

Device description ControllerE, gateways (AC13nn)....................................................29

Operating conditions, installation.............................................................................30
Electrical connection................................................................................................30
LED behaviour (AC13nn).........................................................................................31
Operating and display elements ..............................................................................33
Changing slave parameter data ..............................................................................41
Device description AS-i gateways (AC14nn)................................................................43
Operating conditions, installation.............................................................................43
Electrical connection................................................................................................44
Power supply concepts............................................................................................44
LED behaviour (AC14nn).........................................................................................49
Operating and display elements ..............................................................................50
Quick setup..............................................................................................................57
Device description AS-i power supplies (AC1216, AC1218, AC1223, AC1224,
AC1226)........................................................................................................................67
Operating conditions, installation.............................................................................67
Electrical connection (AC1216...) ............................................................................68
LED behaviour (AC12nn).........................................................................................70
Device description AS-i power supplies (AC1220, AC1221)........................................71
Operating conditions, installation.............................................................................71
Electrical connection................................................................................................71
Output response ......................................................................................................72
3

ifm AS-Interface manual tips and tricks for users edition 2.1

2012-09-26

Contents

4.5

Device description AS-i power supplies (AC1236, AC1244)........................................73

Operating conditions, installation.............................................................................73
Electrical connection................................................................................................73
Output response ......................................................................................................74
4.6
Device description control cabinet modules SmartLine (AC22nn) ...............................75
4.6.1
Operating conditions, installation.............................................................................75
4.6.2
Electrical connection................................................................................................76
4.6.3
Addressing...............................................................................................................76
4.6.4
Connecting analogue periphery (AC2216...AC2220) ..............................................77
4.6.5
LED behaviour (AC2216...AC2220) ........................................................................86
4.7
Device description cabinet modules .............................................................................89
4.7.1
Operating conditions, installation.............................................................................89
4.7.2
Electrical connection................................................................................................89
4.7.3
Addressing...............................................................................................................90
4.7.4
LED behaviour (AC27nn).........................................................................................90
4.8
Device description universal modules (AC20nn, AC26nn)...........................................91
4.8.1
Operating conditions, installation.............................................................................91
4.8.2
Electrical connection................................................................................................91
4.8.3
Addressing...............................................................................................................92
4.8.4
Connecting analogue periphery (AC2616...AC2620) ..............................................92
4.8.5
LED behaviour (AC2032, AC2035, AC2616...AC2620) ....................................... 101
4.9
Device description field modules ClassicLine (screw mounting, AC25nn)................ 103
4.9.1
Operating conditions, installation.......................................................................... 103
4.9.2
Electrical connection............................................................................................. 104
4.9.3
Addressing............................................................................................................ 104
4.9.4
Connecting analogue periphery (AC25nn) ........................................................... 106
4.9.5
LED behaviour (AC25nn)...................................................................................... 114
4.10
Device description field modules ClassicLine (quick mounting, AC52nn)................. 116
4.10.1 Operating conditions, installation.......................................................................... 116
4.10.2 Installing quick mounting modules........................................................................ 117
4.10.3 Electrical connection............................................................................................. 123
4.10.4 Addressing............................................................................................................ 123
4.10.5 Connecting analogue periphery (AC52nn) ........................................................... 124
4.10.6 LED behaviour (AC52nn)...................................................................................... 130
4.11
Device description field modules AirBox (screw mounting, AC20nn)........................ 131
4.11.1 Operating conditions, installation.......................................................................... 131
4.11.2 Electrical connection............................................................................................. 132
4.11.3 Addressing............................................................................................................ 132
4.11.4 Pneumatics ........................................................................................................... 133
4.11.5 LED behaviour AirBox (AC20nn).......................................................................... 136
4.12
Device description field modules AirBox (quick mounting, AC52nn)......................... 137
4.12.1 Operating conditions, installation.......................................................................... 137
4.12.2 Installing quick mounting modules........................................................................ 138
4.12.3 Electrical connection............................................................................................. 144
4.12.4 Addressing............................................................................................................ 144
4.12.5 Pneumatics ........................................................................................................... 145
4.12.6 LED behaviour (AC52nn)...................................................................................... 147
4.13
Device description field modules CompactLine (AC24nn, to June 2010) ................. 148
4.13.1 Operating conditions, installation.......................................................................... 148
4.13.2 Electrical connection............................................................................................. 150
4.13.3 Addressing............................................................................................................ 150
4.13.4 LED behaviour (AC24nn)...................................................................................... 151
4.14
Device description field modules CompactLine (AC24nn, as from June 2010) ........ 152
4.14.1 Operating conditions, installation.......................................................................... 152
4.14.2 Electrical connection............................................................................................. 156
4.14.3 Addressing............................................................................................................ 156
4.14.4 LED behaviour (AC24nn)...................................................................................... 157
4.5.1
4.5.2
4.5.3

4.15
Device description field modules ProcessLine .......................................................... 158
4.15.1 Operating conditions, installation.......................................................................... 158
4.15.2 Electrical connection............................................................................................. 159
4.15.3 Addressing............................................................................................................ 159
4.15.4 Connecting analogue periphery............................................................................ 160
4.15.5 LED behaviour (AC29nn)...................................................................................... 164
4.16
Device description ProcessLine splitter ..................................................................... 166
4.16.1 Splitter (E70354, E70377) .................................................................................... 167
4.16.2 Splitter (E70454)................................................................................................... 169
4.17
Device description IP 67 splitter ................................................................................ 171
4.17.1 FC insulation displacement connector AC5005 ................................................... 172
4.17.2 FC insulation displacement connector E70096 .................................................... 173
4.17.3 FC insulation displacement connector E70381 .................................................... 174
4.17.4 FC insulation displacement connector E70481 .................................................... 175
4.17.5 FC insulation displacement connector E70483 .................................................... 176
4.17.6 FC insulation displacement connector, E70485, E70486..................................... 177
4.17.7 FC insulation displacement connector E70487 .................................................... 178
4.17.8 FC insulation displacement connector E70498, E70499..................................... 179
4.17.9 Mounting (e.g. E70381) ........................................................................................ 180
4.18
Device description repeater, tuner, bus termination .................................................. 181
4.18.1 Extension of the AS-i cable length........................................................................ 182
4.18.2 Device description repeater .................................................................................. 185
4.18.3 Device description tuner ....................................................................................... 188
4.18.4 Device description passive bus termination ......................................................... 191
4.19
Device description addressing units .......................................................................... 193
4.19.1 Addressing unit AC1154 ....................................................................................... 194

AS-i system check

5.1
5.1.1
5.1.2
5.1.3
5.1.4
5.1.5
5.1.6
5.2
5.2.1
5.2.2
5.2.3
5.2.4
5.2.5
5.3
5.3.1
5.3.2
5.3.3
5.3.4
5.3.5
5.4
5.4.1
5.4.2
5.4.3
5.4.4
5.4.5
5.4.6

207

Troubleshooting ControllerE and gateways (AC13nn) .............................................. 207

Boot errors error codes B00...B11..................................................................... 208
AS-i system errors error codes E10...E32 ......................................................... 209
AS-i master command errors error codes M01...M44 ....................................... 212
RTS errors error codes R01...R43..................................................................... 216
List of errors.......................................................................................................... 222
How does the device react in case of a fault? ...................................................... 224
Fault analysis via the controller (AC13nn)................................................................. 225
Number of AS-i voltage failures on the AS-i master............................................. 225
Number of configuration errors on the master...................................................... 227
AS-i telegram errors on the master ...................................................................... 230
Number of disturbed telegrams on the master (by noisy slaves) ......................... 233
Reset error counter............................................................................................... 236
Error analysis via the gateway (AC14nn) .................................................................. 238
Show / delete error counter .................................................................................. 238
Show error messages of the slaves ..................................................................... 239
Show evaluation of the voltage supply ................................................................. 239
Show performance of the AS-i master.................................................................. 240
Online support center (OSC) ................................................................................ 241
Fault analysis via the analyser................................................................................... 242
General ................................................................................................................. 243
LED behaviour analyser (AC1145)....................................................................... 243
Online statistics (standard mode) ......................................................................... 244
Advanced Statistics .............................................................................................. 245
Online statistics without PC .................................................................................. 246
Data mode ............................................................................................................ 247

ifm AS-Interface manual tips and tricks for users edition 2.1

2012-09-26

Contents

5.5
5.5.1
5.5.2
5.5.3
5.5.4
5.5.5
5.6
5.6.1
5.6.2

Earth fault / insulation fault monitoring ...................................................................... 251

What is an earth fault?.......................................................................................... 251
What does an insulation fault monitor do? ........................................................... 251
Symmetrical and asymmetrical earth faults.......................................................... 252
Earth fault monitor AC2211 .................................................................................. 253
Earth fault / insulation fault monitor AC2212 ........................................................ 254
Symmetry measurement............................................................................................ 255
Check the AS-i power supply ............................................................................... 255
Check the AS-i symmetry ..................................................................................... 256

Glossary of Terms

257

Index

268

ifm weltweit ifm worldwide ifm lchelle internationale

277

ifm AS-Interface manual tips and tricks for users edition 2.1

2012-09-26

On this manual

Preface

On this manual
Preface ........................................................................................................................................7
What do the symbols and formats mean? .....................................................................................8
How is this documentation structured? ..........................................................................................9
History of the instructions.............................................................................................................10
6089

Nobody is perfect. Send us your suggestions for improvements to this manual and you will receive a
little gift from us to thank you.
All rights reserved by ifm electronic gmbh. No part of this manual may be reproduced and used
without the consent of ifm electronic gmbh.
All product names, pictures, companies or other brands used on our pages are the property of the respective rights owners:
- AS-i is the property of the AS-International Association, ( www.as-interface.net)
- CAN is the property of the CiA (CAN in Automation e.V.), Germany ( www.can-cia.org)
- CoDeSys is the property of the 3S Smart Software Solutions GmbH, Germany ( www.3s-software.com)
- DeviceNet is the property of the ODVA (Open DeviceNet Vendor Association), USA ( www.odva.org)
- IO-Link ( www.io-link.com) is the property of the PROFIBUS Nutzerorganisation e.V., Germany
- Microsoft is the property of the Microsoft Corporation, USA ( www.microsoft.com)
- PROFIBUS is the property of the PROFIBUS Nutzerorganisation e.V., Germany ( www.profibus.com)
- PROFINET is the property of the PROFIBUS Nutzerorganisation e.V., Germany
- Windows is the property of the Microsoft Corporation, USA

1.1

Preface
6274

This installation manual is intended for those using ifm AS-Interface products in practice (users,
installers, ...).
This manual is intended to provide the user with basic information about the different ifm AS-i product
families.
***

Everyone has probably experienced it already: during setup, the red LED [FAULT] is suddenly lit on
the AS-i module and you are not sure if the module is faulty or if maybe it still has the slave address 0?
Or: how can I extend the AS-i system to 500 m?
Why do the input LED and the periphery fault indication flash on the analogue module?
Can the AirBox also be operated with lubricated compressed air? And, if so, at what minimum
pressure?
***

We have tried to integrate as much information and experience as possible in this AS-Interface
manual - e.g. from service interventions, presentations, customer training, but also from the installation
instructions and device manuals.
Even if this is no complete list of all data and devices, e.g. for "Safety at Work" or ATEX, we have tried
to provide the user with a useful reference document.

ifm AS-Interface manual tips and tricks for users edition 2.1
On this manual

2012-09-26
What do the symbols and formats mean?

For the current rating, voltage values etc. of the different AS-i components please refer to the
corresponding data sheets and installation instructions.
The actual data sheet you will find on the ifm homepage:
www.ifm.com > select your country > [data sheet search] > (article no.)
For corrections and additions to existing documentation please refer to ifm's website:
www.ifm.com > select your country > [data sheet search] > (article no.) > [Additional data]

1.2

What do the symbols and formats mean?

203

The following symbols or pictograms depict different kinds of remarks in our manuals:

WARNING
Death or serious irreversible injuries are possible.

CAUTION
Slight reversible injuries are possible.

NOTICE
Property damage is to be expected or possible.
Important notes on faults and errors
Further hints
...

Required action

>

Response, effect

...

...

"see"

abc

Cross references (links)

[...]

Designations of keys, buttons or display

ifm AS-Interface manual tips and tricks for users edition 2.1
On this manual

1.3

2012-09-26
How is this documentation structured?

How is this documentation structured?

6758

This documentation is a combination of different types of manuals. It is for beginners and also a
reference for advanced users.
How to use this documentation:

Refer to the table of contents to select a specific subject.

Using the index you can also quickly find a term you are looking for.

At the beginning of a chapter we will give you a brief overview of its contents.

Abbreviations and technical terms are listed in the glossary.

In case of malfunctions or uncertainties please contact the manufacturer at:

www.ifm.com > select your country > [Contact].
We want to become even better! Each separate section has an identification number in the top right
corner. If you want to inform us about any inconsistencies, please indicate this number with the title
and the language of this documentation. Thank you for your support.
We reserve the right to make alterations which can result in a change of contents of the
documentation. You can find the current version on ifm's website at:
DE https://www.ifm.com/ifmde/web/asi-download.htm
UK https://www.ifm.com/ifmgb/web/asi-download.htm
FR https://www.ifm.com/ifmfr/web/asi-download.htm

ifm AS-Interface manual tips and tricks for users edition 2.1
On this manual

2012-09-26
History of the instructions

1.4

History of the instructions

11452

What has been changed in this manual? An overview:

Issue

Topic

2nd edition

new: intermediate tables of contents

new: section ident numbers

new: Flat cable AC4007 + AC4008 ( page 21)

revised: Device description ControllerE, gateways (AC13nn) ( page 29)

new: Device description AS-i gateways (AC14nn) ( page 43)

new: Device description AS-i power supplies (AC1220, AC1221) ( page 71)

new: Device description AS-i power supplies (AC1236, AC1244) ( page 73)

Device description control cabinet modules SmartLine (AC22nn) ( page 75)

supplemented by "Measuring range" tables
and supplemented by a note about the addressing socket

Device description universal modules (AC20nn, AC26nn) ( page 91)

supplemented by "Measuring range" tables

Device description field modules ClassicLine (screw mounting, AC25nn) ( page 103)
supplemented by "Measuring range" tables

Device description field modules ClassicLine (quick mounting, AC52nn) ( page 116)
supplemented by the table "Differences AC5222 / AC5223" and
supplemented by a note about the addressing socket

Device description field modules AirBox (screw mounting, AC25nn) ( page 131)
supplemented by a note about the addressing socket

Device description field modules AirBox (quick mounting, AC52nn) ( page 137)
supplemented by a note about the addressing socket

revised: Device description field modules CompactLine (AC24nn, to June 2010) ( page 148)

new: Device description field modules CompactLine (AC24nn, as from 06.2010) ( page 152)

new: Device description IP 67 splitter ( page 171) (E70381, E7048n, E70498, E70499)

new: Device description addressing units ( page 193) (AC1154)

Edition 2.1

Download source of e-learning changed

Edition 2.2

Mistakes corrected

10

ifm AS-Interface manual tips and tricks for users edition 2.1

2012-09-26

Safety instructions

Important!

Safety instructions
Important! .....................................................................................................................................11
What previous knowledge is required? ........................................................................................12
Tampering with the unit................................................................................................................12
213

2.1

Important!
214

No characteristics are warranted with the information, notes and examples provided in this manual.
The drawings, representations and examples imply no responsibility for the system and no applicationspecific particularities.
The manufacturer of the machine/equipment is responsible for the safety of the machine/equipment.

WARNING
Property damage or bodily injury are possible when the notes in this manual are not adhered to!
ifm electronic gmbh does not assume any liability in this regard.
The acting person must have read and understood the safety instructions and the corresponding
chapters of this manual before performing any work on or with this device.
The acting person must be authorised to work on the machine/equipment.
Adhere to the technical data of the devices!
You can find the current data sheet on ifm's homepage at:
www.ifm.com > select your country > [Data sheet search] > (Article no.) > [Technical data in PDF
format]
Note the installation and wiring information as well as the functions and features of the devices!
supplied installation instructions or on ifm's homepage:
www.ifm.com > select your country > [Data sheet search] > (Article no.) > [Operating instructions]

NOTICE
The driver module of the serial interface can be damaged!
Disconnecting the serial interface while live can cause undefined states which damage the driver
module.
Do not disconnect the serial interface while live.
Start-up behaviour of the controller
The manufacturer of the machine/equipment must ensure with his application program that when the
controller starts or restarts no dangerous movements can be triggered.
A restart can, for example, be caused by:

voltage restoration after power failure

reset after watchdog response because of too long a cycle time

11

ifm AS-Interface manual tips and tricks for users edition 2.1
Safety instructions

2.2

2012-09-26
What previous knowledge is required?

What previous knowledge is required?

215

This document is intended for people with knowledge of control technology and PLC programming
with IEC 61131-3.
If this device contains a PLC, in addition these persons should know the CoDeSys software.
The document is intended for specialists. These specialists are people who are qualified by their
training and their experience to see risks and to avoid possible hazards that may be caused during
operation or maintenance of a product. The document contains information about the correct handling
of the product.
Read this document before use to familiarise yourself with operating conditions, installation and
operation. Keep the document during the entire duration of use of the device.
Adhere to the safety instructions.

2.3

Tampering with the unit

11242

WARNING
Tampering with the units can affect the safety of operators and machinery!
Tampering with the units is not allowed.
In case of non-compliance our liability and warranty expire.
Do not open the devices!
Do not insert any objects into the devices!
Prevent metal foreign bodies from penetrating!

12

ifm AS-Interface manual tips and tricks for users edition 2.1

2012-09-26

System description

AS-i topology

System description
AS-i topology ................................................................................................................................13
AS-i flat cable overview................................................................................................................14
Sealing the AS-i flat cable end .....................................................................................................23
Information about AS-i .................................................................................................................23
Overview of the ifm AS-i device families ......................................................................................24
975

3.1

AS-i topology
6478

Several topologies are allowed in AS-i, also mixed topologies:

Star

Line

String

Tree

NOTE
The longest distance (total cable length) from the master must be max. 100 m. Greater distances
require special measures, chapter Extension of the AS-i cable length ( page 182).
Take into account the connection cables (spurs) when calculating the cable length!
The maximum possible cable length might be reduced in case of a reduced cable cross section or
when other cable types are used.

The longest distance (total cable length) from the master must be max. 100 m. Greater distances
require special measures, chapter Extension of the AS-i cable length ( page 182).

Up to 31 single slaves can be connected to each AS-i master.

As from AS-i specification 2.11:

Up to 31 single slaves or up to 31 A slaves and 31 B slaves can be connected to each AS-i

master.

A mixed connection of single slaves and A/B slaves to the same master is possible.

13

ifm AS-Interface manual tips and tricks for users edition 2.1

2012-09-26

System description

3.2

AS-i flat cable overview

AS-i flat cable overview

Flat cable AC4000 + AC4002.......................................................................................................15
Flat cable AC4001 + AC4006.......................................................................................................17
Flat cable AC4003 + AC4004.......................................................................................................19
Flat cable AC4007 + AC4008.......................................................................................................21
6479

14

Flat cable
yellow

Flat cable
black

Material

AC4000

AC4002

EPDM

AC4001

AC4006

PUR

AC4003

AC4004

TPE

AC4007

AC4008

TPE+PVC

ifm AS-Interface manual tips and tricks for users edition 2.1

2012-09-26

System description

3.2.1

AS-i flat cable overview

Flat cable AC4000 + AC4002

11243

Characteristics
11244

Material

EPDM

free from halogen

yes

external sheath silicone-free

yes

flame-retardant, self-extinguishing

no

free from asbestos, PCB, CFC

yes

suitable for drag chains

no

Resistance to environmental influences

11245

ozone

no cracks (to EN 60811-2-1)

water, hot water, steam

yes

sea water

yes

ammonia

yes

mineral oils

conditionally resistant

animal and vegetable oils and fats (e.g. olive oil)

conditionally resistant to not resistant

butter, coconut oil, castor oil, soybean oil

conditionally resistant to not resistant

dry chlorine

conditionally resistant

wet chlorine, bromine, iodine

yes

methanol, ethanol, butanol

yes

propanol

yes

ethylene glycol

yes

glycerine

yes

aromatic hydrocarbons
(e.g. benzene, toluene, tetralin, naphthalene

no

regular petrol

no

diesel

no

hydrochloric acid

yes, up to 37 %

sulphuric acid

yes, up to 75 %

nitric acid

yes, up to 30 %

sodium hydroxide solution

yes, up to 10 %

polar solvents, acetone

yes

15

ifm AS-Interface manual tips and tricks for users edition 2.1

2012-09-26

System description

AS-i flat cable overview

Temperature characteristics
11246

Limit temperature for operation, installation, transport and storage:

on the wire during operation
on the wire in case of short circuit

+ 90 C
+ 200 C

on the surface, cable firmly laid

-40...+85 C

moving, upon laying

-25...+85 C

16

ifm AS-Interface manual tips and tricks for users edition 2.1

2012-09-26

System description

3.2.2

AS-i flat cable overview

Flat cable AC4001 + AC4006

11247

Characteristics
11248

Material

PUR

free from halogen

yes

external sheath silicone-free

yes

flame-retardant, self-extinguishing
free from asbestos, PCB, CFC
suitable for drag chains

good
yes
conditionally resistant acc. to DIN VDE 0472 part 603

Resistance to environmental influences

11249

ozone
water, hot water, steam

yes
yes, up to 100 C *)

sea water

yes

ammonia

yes

mineral oils

yes

animal and vegetable oils and fats (e.g. olive oil)

no data

butter, coconut oil, castor oil, soybean oil

no data

dry chlorine

no data

wet chlorine, bromine, iodine

no data

methanol, ethanol, butanol

yes

propanol

no data

ethylene glycol

no data

glycerine

no data

aromatic hydrocarbons
(e.g. benzene, toluene, tetralin, naphthalene

benzene: conditionally resistant;

toluene: no;
other: no data

regular petrol

yes

diesel

yes

hydrochloric acid

yes, up to 20 %

sulphuric acid

yes, up to 30 %

nitric acid

yes, up to 10 %

sodium hydroxide solution

yes, up to 10 %

polar solvents, acetone

fades easily, becomes softer

*) short-time cleaning and disinfection

17

ifm AS-Interface manual tips and tricks for users edition 2.1

2012-09-26

System description

AS-i flat cable overview

Temperature characteristics
11250

Limit temperature for operation, installation, transport and storage:

on the wire during operation
on the wire in case of short circuit

-----

on the surface, cable firmly laid

-40...+85 C

moving, upon laying

-30...+85 C

18

ifm AS-Interface manual tips and tricks for users edition 2.1

2012-09-26

System description

3.2.3

AS-i flat cable overview

Flat cable AC4003 + AC4004

11251

Characteristics
11252

Material

TPE

free from halogen

no

external sheath silicone-free

yes

flame-retardant, self-extinguishing
free from asbestos, PCB, CFC
suitable for drag chains

good
yes
conditionally resistant acc. to DIN VDE 0472 part 603

Resistance to environmental influences

11253

ozone

yes

water, hot water, steam

yes, up to 100 C

sea water

yes, up to 70 C

ammonia

no data,
probably conditionally resistant

mineral oils

yes, up to 70 C

animal and vegetable oils and fats (e.g. olive oil)

yes

butter, coconut oil, castor oil, soybean oil

yes

dry chlorine

no data

wet chlorine, bromine, iodine

no data

methanol, ethanol, butanol

propanol
ethylene glycol
glycerine
aromatic hydrocarbons
(e.g. benzene, toluene, tetralin, naphthalene
regular petrol
diesel

yes
no data
yes
probably weak to mild influence
benzene + toluene: strong influence;
otherwise probably the same (no data)
fades easily
yes

hydrochloric acid

yes, up to 37 %

sulphuric acid

yes, up to 30 %

nitric acid

yes, up to 10 %

sodium hydroxide solution

yes, up to 10 %

polar solvents, acetone

fades easily, becomes harder

19

ifm AS-Interface manual tips and tricks for users edition 2.1

2012-09-26

System description

AS-i flat cable overview

Temperature characteristics
11254

Limit temperature for operation, installation, transport and storage:

on the wire during operation
on the wire in case of short circuit

-----

on the surface, cable firmly laid

-40...+105 C

moving, upon laying

-30...+105 C

20

ifm AS-Interface manual tips and tricks for users edition 2.1

2012-09-26

System description

3.2.4

AS-i flat cable overview

Flat cable AC4007 + AC4008

11255

Characteristics
11256

Material

TPE+PVC

free from halogen

no

external sheath silicone-free

yes

flame-retardant, self-extinguishing
free from asbestos, PCB, CFC
suitable for drag chains

good
yes
conditionally resistant acc. to DIN VDE 0472 part 603

Resistance to environmental influences

11257

ozone

yes

water, hot water, steam

yes, up to 100 C

sea water

yes, up to 70 C

ammonia

no data,
probably conditionally resistant

mineral oils

yes, up to 70 C

animal and vegetable oils and fats (e.g. olive oil)

yes

butter, coconut oil, castor oil, soybean oil

yes

dry chlorine

no data

wet chlorine, bromine, iodine

no data

methanol, ethanol, butanol

propanol
ethylene glycol
glycerine
aromatic hydrocarbons
(e.g. benzene, toluene, tetralin, naphthalene
regular petrol
diesel

yes
no data
yes
probably weak to mild influence
benzene + toluene: strong influence;
otherwise probably the same (no data)
fades easily
yes

hydrochloric acid

yes, up to 37 %

sulphuric acid

yes, up to 30 %

nitric acid

yes, up to 10 %

sodium hydroxide solution

yes, up to 10 %

polar solvents, acetone

additional cleaning agents

fades easily, becomes harder

yes **)

**) alkaline containing surfactants; highly alkaline containing surfactants; foam cleaning with active chlorine; TFC procedure
(Thin Film Cleaning);
acid foam cleaning agents (with or without organic acids); peracetic acid-containing disinfectant

21

ifm AS-Interface manual tips and tricks for users edition 2.1

2012-09-26

System description

AS-i flat cable overview

Temperature characteristics
11258

Limit temperature for operation, installation, transport and storage:

on the wire during operation
on the wire in case of short circuit

-----

on the surface, cable firmly laid

-40...+105 C

moving, upon laying

-30...+105 C

22

ifm AS-Interface manual tips and tricks for users edition 2.1
System description

3.3

2012-09-26
Sealing the AS-i flat cable end

Sealing the AS-i flat cable end

6646

Protect the flat cable end against moisture and direct machine contact to avoid short circuits.
Several methods of sealing the cable are available for AS-i flat cables:
E70113

heat-shrink cap for sealing the flat

cable ends (closed on one side)

E70413

flat cable connection IP 67

housing material = ULTRAMID
sealing material = NBR
application examples
E70113 / E70413

AC5000
+AC3000

3.4

FC lower part and cover

Information about AS-i

6278

Here you will find further information to understand AS-Interface better in general.

Online training in the ifm download area:

DE https://www.ifm.com/ifmde/web/asi-download.htm
UK https://www.ifm.com/ifmgb/web/asi-download.htm
FR https://www.ifm.com/ifmfr/web/asi-download.htm
> [AS-i Animations] > E-learning

Literature: www.as-interface.net > [THE SYSTEM] > [Publications]

23

ifm AS-Interface manual tips and tricks for users edition 2.1
System description

3.5

2012-09-26
Overview of the ifm AS-i device families

Overview of the ifm AS-i device families

6277

Device family
ControllerE and gateways (AC13nn)
Device description ControllerE, gateways
(AC13nn) ( page 29)

AS-i gateways (AC14nn)

Device description AS-i gateways (AC14nn)
( page 43)

AS-i power supplies (AC1216,

AC1218, AC1223, AC1224, AC1226)
Device description AS-i power supplies (AC1216,
AC1218, AC1223, AC1224, AC1226) ( page 67)

AS-i power supplies (AC1220,

AC1221)
Device description AS-i power supplies (AC1220,
AC1221) ( page 71)

24

Sample units

ifm AS-Interface manual tips and tricks for users edition 2.1
System description

Device family

2012-09-26
Overview of the ifm AS-i device families

Sample units

AS-i power supplies (AC1236,

AC1244)
Device description AS-i power supplies (AC1236,
AC1244) ( page 73)

Control cabinet modules SmartLine

(AC22nn)
Device description control cabinet modules
SmartLine (AC22nn) ( page 75)

Cabinet modules (AC27nn)

Device description cabinet modules
( page 89)

Universal modules
(AC20nn, AC26nn)
Device description universal modules (AC20nn,
AC26nn) ( page 91)

25

ifm AS-Interface manual tips and tricks for users edition 2.1
System description

Device family
Field modules ClassicLine (screw
mounting, AC25nn)
Device description field modules ClassicLine
(screw mounting, AC25nn) ( page 103)

Field modules ClassicLine (quick

mounting, AC52nn)
Device description field modules ClassicLine
(quick mounting, AC52nn) ( page 116)

Field modules AirBox (screw

mounting, AC20nn)
Device description field modules AirBox (screw
mounting, AC20nn) ( page 131)

Field modules AirBox (quick

mounting, AC52nn)
Device description field modules AirBox (quick
mounting) ( page 137)

26

2012-09-26
Overview of the ifm AS-i device families

Sample units

ifm AS-Interface manual tips and tricks for users edition 2.1
System description

Device family

2012-09-26
Overview of the ifm AS-i device families

Sample units

Field modules CompactLine

(to June 2010) (AC24nn)
Device description field modules CompactLine
( page 148)

Field modules CompactLine

(as from June 2010) (AC24nn)
Device description field modules CompactLine
(as from June 2010) ( page 152)

Field modules ProcessLine

(AC29nn)
Device description field modules ProcessLine
( page 158)

27

ifm AS-Interface manual tips and tricks for users edition 2.1
System description

Device family
ProcessLine IP 69K splitter (E70nnn)
Device description ProcessLine splitter
( page 166)

IP 67 splitter (AC5005, E70nnn)

Device description IP 67 splitter ( page 171)

Repeater (AC2225),
Tuner (AC1146),
Bus termination (AC1147)
Device description repeater, tuner, bus
termination ( page 181)

Earth fault and insulation fault

monitors (AC2211, AC2212)
Earth fault / insulation fault monitoring
( page 251)

Addressing unit (AC1154)

Addressing unit AC1154 ( page 194)

28

2012-09-26
Overview of the ifm AS-i device families

Sample units

ifm AS-Interface manual tips and tricks for users edition 2.1
Device descriptions

2012-09-26
Device description ControllerE, gateways (AC13nn)

Device descriptions
Device description ControllerE, gateways (AC13nn) ...................................................................29
Device description AS-i gateways (AC14nn) ...............................................................................43
Device description AS-i power supplies (AC1216, AC1218, AC1223, AC1224, AC1226) ..........67
Device description AS-i power supplies (AC1220, AC1221) .......................................................71
Device description AS-i power supplies (AC1236, AC1244) .......................................................73
Device description control cabinet modules SmartLine (AC22nn)...............................................75
Device description cabinet modules.............................................................................................89
Device description universal modules (AC20nn, AC26nn) ..........................................................91
Device description field modules ClassicLine (screw mounting, AC25nn) ............................... 103
Device description field modules ClassicLine (quick mounting, AC52nn) ................................ 116
Device description field modules AirBox (screw mounting, AC20nn) ....................................... 131
Device description field modules AirBox (quick mounting, AC52nn) ........................................ 137
Device description field modules CompactLine (AC24nn, to June 2010)................................. 148
Device description field modules CompactLine (AC24nn, as from June 2010)........................ 152
Device description field modules ProcessLine.......................................................................... 158
Device description ProcessLine splitter .................................................................................... 166
Device description IP 67 splitter................................................................................................ 171
Device description repeater, tuner, bus termination ................................................................. 181
Device description addressing units.......................................................................................... 193
4

6300

4.1

Device description ControllerE, gateways

(AC13nn)
Operating conditions, installation .................................................................................................30
Electrical connection ....................................................................................................................30
LED behaviour (AC13nn) .............................................................................................................31
Operating and display elements...................................................................................................33
Changing slave parameter data ...................................................................................................41
6302

Example:

AC13nn

29

ifm AS-Interface manual tips and tricks for users edition 2.1
Device descriptions

4.1.1

2012-09-26
Device description ControllerE, gateways (AC13nn)

Operating conditions, installation

6303

Protection IP 20.

Installation only in a condensation-free environment.

Avoid excessive dust, vibration and shock.
The air circulation through the vents must not be impeded.
Minimum distance above and below the device 30 mm.
Avoid installation in the direct vicinity of frequency inverters.

4.1.2

Electrical connection
6304

Disconnect the installation from power.

The national and international regulations for the installation of electrical equipment must be
adhered to.
Connect the device as indicated on the terminals.
Never connect the minus potentials to each other, e.g.:
AS-i- to 0 V of the 24 V DC supply or
AS-i- to FE (functional earth), etc.
FE serves for Functional Earth, not for protective earth.
The FE terminal is internally connected to the housing and the DIN rail fixing. This internal connection
is only useful if an electrical connection to the machine ground exists.
Connect the FE terminal (= functional earth) of the device to the machine ground, if an
ungrounded supply voltage (24 V DC) is used.
Do not use the FE terminal of the device when there is a supply voltage of 24 V DC (0 V
grounded).

30

ifm AS-Interface manual tips and tricks for users edition 2.1

2012-09-26

Device descriptions

4.1.3

Device description ControllerE, gateways (AC13nn)

LED behaviour (AC13nn)

6306

The three diagnostic LEDs on the device inform about the status of the AS-i master and the connected
systems:

Figure: Diagnostic LEDs on the ControllerE with 2 AS-i masters and Ethernet programming interface

The LEDs [ASI2] including their labelling are an option for the second AS-i master.

LEDs [PWR/COM], [PROJ], [CONF/PF], [24V PWR]

11455

LED
colour

LED off

LED lit

LED flashes

green

no supply for AS-i bus 1

AS-i supply is available; at least

1 slave on the bus was recognised

AS-i supply is available; no slave

on the bus was recognised

yellow

AS-i master in protected mode

AS-i master in projection mode;

configuration monitoring is
deactivated

projection mode active;

changeover to protected mode not
possible because a slave with the
address 0 is connected

red

configuration and periphery ok

projected and current configuration

periphery fault detected
do not match

green

no supply for AS-i bus 2

AS-i supply is available; at least

1 slave on the bus was recognised

AS-i supply is available; no slave

on the bus was recognised

yellow

AS-i master in protected mode

AS-i master in projection mode;

configuration monitoring is
deactivated

projection mode active;

changeover to protected mode not
possible because a slave with the
address 0 is connected

AS-i bus 2:
Configuration
Periphery Fault

red

configuration and periphery ok

projected and current configuration

periphery fault detected
do not match

[24V PWR]

green

no 24 V operating voltage

24 V operating voltage available

Diagnostic LEDs
ASI1 [PWR/COM]
AS-i bus 1:
Power
Communication
ASI1 [PROJ]
AS-i bus 1:
Projection
ASI1 [CONF/PF]
AS-i bus 1:
Configuration
Periphery Fault
ASI2 [PWR/COM]
AS-i bus 2:
Power
Communication
ASI2 [PROJ]
AS-i bus 2:
Projection
ASI2 [CONF/PF]

---

31

ifm AS-Interface manual tips and tricks for users edition 2.1

2012-09-26

Device descriptions

Device description ControllerE, gateways (AC13nn)

LED [PLC RUN]

11456

The LED [PLC RUN] is optional for the PLC in the ControllerE including its labelling:
Diagnostic LEDs

[PLC RUN]

LED
colour

LED off

yellow

Profibus device:
ControllerE operates as gateway

LED lit
The PLC program in the
ControllerE is running
Fieldbus device (no Profibus):
Gateway function is active

LED flashes

The PLC program in the

ControllerE is stopped

LED [ETH NET]

11457

The LED [ETH NET] is optional for the Ethernet programming interface including its labelling:
Diagnostic LEDs

LED
colour

[ETH NET]

yellow

LED off

LED lit

LED flashes

no communication in the Ethernet LED flashes for each data package

(only for access via CoDeSys Ethernet protocols)

LED [BUS FAIL]

11458

The LED [Bus Failure] is optional for the Profibus interface including its labelling:
Diagnostic LEDs

LED
colour

LED off

LED lit

LED flashes

when response monitoring

(watchdog) active: no Profibus
connection

device error
message text in text/graphics
display

when response monitoring

(watchdog) active: Profibus
connection ok
[BUS FAIL]

red

OR:
master switched off
OR:
response monitoring (watchdog)
deactivated

32

ifm AS-Interface manual tips and tricks for users edition 2.1

2012-09-26

Device descriptions

Device description ControllerE, gateways (AC13nn)

LEDs fieldbus interface

11459
4539

4 status LEDs on the ControllerE inform about the status of the fieldbus interface and the systems
connected to it:
Module State

Net State

Link to Fieldbus

Transmission Activity

Graphics: status LEDs on the network connection

The colours and meanings of these 4 LEDs depend on the type of interface, e.g.:
CANopen

AC1331, AC1332

DeviceNet

AC1308, AC1314, AC1318, AC1324

EtherCAT

AC1391, AC1392

Ethernet/IP

AC1307, AC1317, AC1327, AC1337

corresponding device manual

4.1.4

Operating and display elements

11288

Key functions
5460

The four keys on the device enable quick and easy handling of the menu:

The [ ] und [ ] keys are used for selecting the menu or for changing the displayed values. Menus with
more than three options are adapted automatically. If it is possible to move upwards and downwards in
the menu, this is indicated by means of small arrows in the middle of the lowest line of the display
( Menu screen ( page 34)).
The two outer keys are function keys. Their function depends on the menu screen and is indicated in
the lowest row of the display by means of inverted texts.
PLC Setup

Example:

Slave Lists

Here the left key is used for the function [OK], i.e. to confirm the
selected menu item.

The right key is used for the function [ESC], i.e. to return to the
previous menu level.

Address Slave
OK

1
!

ESC

33

ifm AS-Interface manual tips and tricks for users edition 2.1
Device descriptions

2012-09-26
Device description ControllerE, gateways (AC13nn)

Display (presentation, language, contrast/brightness)

What is what in the text/graphics display? ...................................................................................34
Text/graphics display: Switch language .......................................................................................36
Text/graphics display: Set contrast/brightness ............................................................................37
5447

Using the text/graphics display on the device enables a more detailed system diagnosis. With the four
keys the device is easy to use. The bilingual structure of the menus and messages simplifies
worldwide use of this device family. An intelligent message management generates priority-based
diagnostic and error messages and supports the user during set-up.
The respective function of the keys is displayed dynamically above the keys.
After power-on of the gateway the device displays either a start screen with the ifm logo (AC1376) or
with the headline "AS-i DP Gateway" (AC1375) or if available a list of the errors in the connected
AS-i systems. In any case, the system menu can be accessed by pressing the left [MENU] button.

What is what in the text/graphics display?

5449

Menu screen
5450

PLC Setup

>

Usually the menu shows 3 to 5 lines similar to those on the left.

Slave Lists

>

One menu line is inverted:

This shows the active or selected entry. By pressing on [OK] the
device changes to the respective menu screen.

>

00:
Number of the menu screen.

>

Triangles [ ] or [ ]:
note which arrow keys can be used to scroll in the menus (or: to move
the line marking).

Address Slave
OK

00

ESC

Press [ ] or [ ] to scroll through the menu or the values:

[ ] = scroll through the menu points or increment the value,
[ ] = scroll through the menu points or decrement the value.
Press [OK] to select marked menu item.
Press [ESC] to quit this menu to go to the previous menu level.
In this documentation we show the menu version for the device AC1376 (2 AS-i master).
Some menus are slightly different and / or have other menu screen numbers for the device AC1375
(1 AS-i master). We indicate the deviations.

34

ifm AS-Interface manual tips and tricks for users edition 2.1
Device descriptions

2012-09-26
Device description ControllerE, gateways (AC13nn)

Error screen
5452

In case of a configuration error or failure the start screen of the text/graphics display will provide
information as shown in the following screen:
E25 ASi1

Display of an error when the start screen was active:

Config. Error

>

E25 = error number, chapter Troubleshooting ControllerE and gateways

(AC13nn) ( page 207).

>

ASi1 = concerned AS-i master channel number.

>

Config. Error:
There is a configuration error.

>

1/2:
First page of 2 with troubleshooting.

>

Flashing "!":
There is an error message.

>

LED [CONF/PF] lights.

>

Triangles [ ] / [ ]
note which arrow keys can be used to scroll.

MENU

1/2
!

USER

PLC Setup

Display of an error when any menu screen is active:

Slave Lists

>

Flashing "!":
There is an error message.

>

LED [CONF/PF] lights.

>

Triangles [ ] / [ ]
note which arrow keys can be used to scroll.

Address Slave
OK

1
!

ESC

Return to the start screen with [ESC].

>

An error screen as described above appears.

35

ifm AS-Interface manual tips and tricks for users edition 2.1
Device descriptions

2012-09-26
Device description ControllerE, gateways (AC13nn)

Text/graphics display: Switch language

5454

There are 2 languages stored for the text/graphics display in the device. You can change between the
languages at any time.

Step 1:
>

Example: current language = English.

[ ] and [ ] pressed simultaneously for about 2 seconds.

MENU

USER

simultaneously!
Select language
English
German
SET

160

ESC

Select language
English

Step 2:
>

Text/graphics display is reinitialised.

>

Indication of the current language (here: English).

Move to the requested language with [ ] or [ ].

Step 3:
Select the requested language with [SET].

German
SET

160

ESC

Language selection
English

>

German
SET

Step 4:
Display changes to the requested language.

Quit language selection with [ESC].

160

ESC

>

That's it!

English is always available and is set as default language on delivery. The other language depends on
the device version ( AS-i catalogue). Therefore, the menus shown in this manual are only in English.

36

ifm AS-Interface manual tips and tricks for users edition 2.1
Device descriptions

2012-09-26
Device description ControllerE, gateways (AC13nn)

Text/graphics display: Set contrast/brightness

5456

If the text/graphics display is difficult to read, the contrast can be set:

>

The display is too bright / too pale:

Press these buttons simultaneously.
>

Contrast is increased / screen becomes darker.

simultaneously!
>

The display is too dark:

Press these buttons simultaneously.
>

Contrast is decreased / screen becomes brighter.

simultaneously!
>

The text/graphics display indicates nothing any more (only background illumination
active).
All other functions of the device are not affected.
[ ] and [ ] pressed simultaneously for about 2 seconds.

simultaneously!

>

Text/graphics display is reinitialised.

>

Language selection is active.

Quit language selection with [ESC].

The device automatically stores the last setting.

37

ifm AS-Interface manual tips and tricks for users edition 2.1
Device descriptions

2012-09-26
Device description ControllerE, gateways (AC13nn)

Menu navigation
Quick Setup..................................................................................................................................38
PLC Setup ....................................................................................................................................38
Slave Lists ....................................................................................................................................38
Address Slaves ............................................................................................................................38
Diagnostics...................................................................................................................................39
Master Setup ................................................................................................................................39
Fieldbus Setup .............................................................................................................................39
Slave Info .....................................................................................................................................40
Slave Setup ..................................................................................................................................40
System Setup ...............................................................................................................................40
System Info ..................................................................................................................................40
6310

Quick Setup
6313

Summary of the menu items required for a basic configuration:

Reading of the current AS-i configuration (config all).

Setting of the fieldbus connection (optional).

PLC Setup
6316

Menu only for ControllerE. Using the integrated PLC is optional.

Activate (= no PLC used) or deactivate the gateway mode.

Start or stop the PLC in the ControllerE (if used).

Slave Lists
6311

Checking of the addresses of the AS-i slaves connected to the AS-i master:

List of detected AS-i slaves (LDS).

List of projected AS-i slaves (LPS).

List of activated AS-i slaves (LAS).

List of AS-i slaves with periphery fault (LPF).

Address Slaves
6312

Programming of the correct addresses in the connected AS-i slaves:

Readdressing of an AS-i slave connected to the device.

Automatic addressing of new AS-i slaves to the next free address (easy start-up).

38

ifm AS-Interface manual tips and tricks for users edition 2.1
Device descriptions

2012-09-26
Device description ControllerE, gateways (AC13nn)

Diagnostics
6319

Display of error counters and AS-i cycle time:

Display of the number of cases of undervoltage on the AS-i bus.

Display of the number of detected configuration errors since the last reset.

Display of faulty AS-i telegrams in percent of the sent telegrams.

Display of the number of active slaves.

Display of the number of AS-i cycles per second.

Display of the number of disturbed telegrams of each active slave.

Reset of the error counter.

Display of the longest AS-i cycle time after last reset.

Reset of the previous test series and start of a new test series.

Master Setup
6318

Set operating modes master:

In the operating mode "Config all": reading of the current AS-i configuration (config all)

Changing the operating mode:

Operating mode "protected": standard mode (the master monitors the configuration) Changes
to the slaves are detected. Slaves with a different projected profile are not activated.

Operating mode "Config all": Changes to the slaves are detected. All connected slaves are
active.

Automatic addressing of AS-i slaves ON / OFF:

Automatic addressing ON:

Permits the replaced slave (with the same profile!) to be assigned the address of the old slave
in the protected mode (default).

Automatic addressing OFF:

The replaced slave must be manually set to the right address.

AS-i reset when leaving the projection mode ON / OFF:

Slave reset ON:

After switching the master to the protected mode the device briefly sets all slave outputs to "0"
(default).

Slave reset OFF:

The status of the slave outputs remains unchanged when switching to another operating
mode.

Fieldbus Setup
6320

The different fieldbus interfaces are optional.

Input of the slave address of the device as projected in the higher-level fieldbus master.

Further inputs depending on the higher-level fieldbus.

39

ifm AS-Interface manual tips and tricks for users edition 2.1
Device descriptions

2012-09-26
Device description ControllerE, gateways (AC13nn)

Slave Info
6321

Displaying status information of individual active slaves:

Data of the digital inputs and outputs (binary + hexadecimal).

Data of the analogue channels (decimal).

Entries in the lists of active / detected / projected slaves / slaves with periphery fault.

Slave profile configuration.

Slave parameters.

Number of telegram errors.

Slave Setup
6322

Displaying or changing output data or parameters of individual slaves:

Digital and analogue outputs of the connected AS-i slaves.

Current and projected parameters of the connected AS-i slaves.

Current and projected I/O and ID codes of the connected AS-i slaves.

System Setup
6314

Central device settings:

Baud rate of the serial programming interface.

IP address of the Ethernet programming interface (optional).

Input of the password to enable changes in the system configuration.

Update of the firmware of the device (special programming software required).

Reset of the device to the factory setting.

History memory of the last system errors which had to be acknowledged.

System Info
6315

Display of all system parameters:

Hardware and firmware version numbers of the device.

Serial number of the device.

Current / maximum PLC cycle time.

40

ifm AS-Interface manual tips and tricks for users edition 2.1
Device descriptions

4.1.5

2012-09-26
Device description ControllerE, gateways (AC13nn)

Changing slave parameter data

6834

NOTE
The parameter data are only stored in the AS-i master.
Changes to the slave parameter data with an addressing unit (e.g. AC1145 or AC1154) are NOT
possible.

Devices with Profibus DP interface

6504

For devices with Profibus DP interface (e.g. AC1355/56, AC1365/66, AC1375/76) the adaptation of
AS-i slave parameters is preferably carried out via the Profibus DP configuration.
Example: Siemens S7 with AS-i gateway AC1376:

To do so, change the initial values of the A/B slaves from 0xF to 0x7 if necessary.

41

ifm AS-Interface manual tips and tricks for users edition 2.1
Device descriptions

2012-09-26
Device description ControllerE, gateways (AC13nn)

Setting slave parameters via the device display in the AS-i master
6505

For ControllerE units with RTS > 2 and SmartLink with RTS > 1.4 the slave parameters can also be
set via the device display in the AS-i master:
[Menu] > [Slave Setup] > select master > parameter value

NOTE
The change made is NOT non-volatile.
To permanently save the parameter setting, reconfigure the AS-i master after the parameter
change:
[Menu] > [Quick Setup] > [Config all]

Change of parameter data via command channels

6835

Depending on the device type and version, up to 2 different command channels are available, by
means of which the AS-i slave parameters can be adapted with the specific commands.
Details device manual

42

ifm AS-Interface manual tips and tricks for users edition 2.1
Device descriptions

4.2

2012-09-26
Device description AS-i gateways (AC14nn)

Device description AS-i gateways (AC14nn)

Operating conditions, installation .................................................................................................43
Electrical connection ....................................................................................................................44
Power supply concepts ................................................................................................................44
LED behaviour (AC14nn) .............................................................................................................49
Operating and display elements...................................................................................................50
Quick setup ..................................................................................................................................57
11261

Example:

AC14nn

4.2.1

Operating conditions, installation

6303

Protection IP 20.

Installation only in a condensation-free environment.

Avoid excessive dust, vibration and shock.
The air circulation through the vents must not be impeded.
Minimum distance above and below the device 30 mm.
Avoid installation in the direct vicinity of frequency inverters.

43

ifm AS-Interface manual tips and tricks for users edition 2.1

2012-09-26

Device descriptions

4.2.2

Device description AS-i gateways (AC14nn)

Electrical connection
11264

Disconnect the installation from power.

The national and international regulations for the installation of electrical equipment must be
adhered to.
Connect the device as indicated on the terminals.
Do never connect the minus potentials to each other, e.g.:
AS-i with 0 V or 24 V DC supply or
AS-i with FE (functional earth) etc.
FE serves for Functional Earth, not for protective earth.
The FE terminal is internally connected to the housing and the DIN rail fixing. This internal connection
is only useful if an electrical connection to the machine ground exists.
Connect the FE terminal (= functional earth) of the device to the machine ground.

4.2.3

Power supply concepts

General conditions .......................................................................................................................45

Supply concept 1..........................................................................................................................45
Supply concept 2..........................................................................................................................46
Supply concept 3..........................................................................................................................47
11266

Figure: supply connections on the device

top: X1 plug, 6 poles:

for AS-i 1, AS-i 2 and FE
pin 1

AS-i 2 +

pin 2

AS-i 2

pin 3

AS-i 1 +

pin 4

AS-i 1

pin 5

FE

pin 6

n.c.

bottom: X2 plug, 2 poles

pin 1

AUX + 24 V

pin 2

AUX 0 V

below: AUX jumper

44

ifm AS-Interface manual tips and tricks for users edition 2.1
Device descriptions

2012-09-26
Device description AS-i gateways (AC14nn)

General conditions
8680

Adhere to the installation instructions!

AUX and AS-i are safely generated, touchable extra-low DC SELV voltages

AUX is in the range 18.0...32.0 V DC

AUX can be grounded (SELV PELV)

Supply concept 1
6941

Device supply via AUX.

AS-i master 1 and AS-i master 2 are supplied via separate AS-i power supplies.

AUX jumper must not be connected!

Example: Supply concept 1

45

ifm AS-Interface manual tips and tricks for users edition 2.1

2012-09-26

Device descriptions

Device description AS-i gateways (AC14nn)

Supply concept 2
6946

Device supply via AS-i 1.

AS-i 1 and AS-i 2 are supplied via separate AS-i power supplies.

The AUX jumper (supplied with the device) must be connected!

The AUX jumper covers the AUX connection of the device and thus prevents a simultaneous
application of a voltage to the X2 plug.
Photo: AUX jumper

Example: Supply concept 2

46

Photo: AUX jumper, inserted in the device

ifm AS-Interface manual tips and tricks for users edition 2.1

2012-09-26

Device descriptions

Device description AS-i gateways (AC14nn)

Supply concept 3
6943

Total supply (gateway, AS-i 1, AS-i 2) via one single voltage source:
- 21.0...31.6 V at option (grounded or ungrounded)
- or an AS-i power supply.

The AC1250 data decoupling module (accessory) must be connected!

An external AC1250 data coupling module that is fixed to the
device is absolutely required.
The data decoupling module has the following tasks:

The module supplies the device with voltage.

The module generates a special AS-i voltage (data decoupled)

for two AS-i networks beginning on the device, i.e.:

from a standard 24 V DC power supply

or from a 30 V DC power supply

or from a conventional AS-i power supply.

The max. current per AS-i network is 4 A.

Photo: AC1250 data decoupling module (accessory)

Voltage U at the AUX+ and AUX- terminals of the data Result

decoupling module
21.5 V DC < U < 30.0 V DC

Power24 (not recommended)

limited AS-i cable length < 50 m
only AS-i slaves with special Power24
capability are allowed

30.0 V DC < U < 31.6 V DC

or an AS-i power supply

standard AS-i (recommended)

47

ifm AS-Interface manual tips and tricks for users edition 2.1
Device descriptions

2012-09-26
Device description AS-i gateways (AC14nn)

Example 1: Supply concept 3: here: supply of 2 devices via the AS-i power supply 8 A

Example 2: Supply concept 3: here: supply of 3 devices via the AS-i power supply 20 A

The power of the AS-i power supply can be distributed to the single AS-i lines as requested,
provided that max. 4 A are applied to a single AS-i line.

48

ifm AS-Interface manual tips and tricks for users edition 2.1

2012-09-26

Device descriptions

4.2.4

Device description AS-i gateways (AC14nn)

LED behaviour (AC14nn)

11268

Diagnostic LED: Basic device

6950

Diagnostic LED
H1

Description

green

lights

device has been started. There is no warning or error message.

yellow

flashes 0.5 Hz

there is a warning but not an error message

red

flashes 2 Hz

there is an error message

Diagnostic LED: Fieldbus Profinet

6951

Diagnostic LED

Description

H2

yellow

flashes

receipt of data

H3

green

lights

physical connection OK

H4

yellow

flashes

receipt of data

H5

green

lights

physical connection OK

49

ifm AS-Interface manual tips and tricks for users edition 2.1

2012-09-26

Device descriptions

Device description AS-i gateways (AC14nn)

4.2.5

Operating and display elements

11269
8700

Legend:
1. unlocking key for detaching the unit
from
a DIN rail
2. H1 status LED
3. IP20 metal housing
4. text/graphics display
5. 2 function keys
6. 4 arrow keys
7. X1 connector for
AS-i 1, AS-i 2, functional earth
8. X2 connector for AUX (here with AUX
jumper)
9. slot for SD card (behind the front flap)
10. X3 Ethernet configuration interface
(behind the front flap)
11. X7 Profinet interface 1
H4, H5: status LED
12. X6 Profinet interface 2
H2, H3: status LED
Photo: Overview AS-i Profinet gateway

Key functions
6930

There are 6 membrane keys on the user interface of the device below the display:
menu text for the left function key
left function key

arrow keys for navigation

or changing values

50

menu text for the right function

key
right function key

ifm AS-Interface manual tips and tricks for users edition 2.1
Device descriptions

2012-09-26
Device description AS-i gateways (AC14nn)

Function keys
7090

2 function keys directly below the display are used for selecting functions,
menu items or display levels.
The labelling of the function keys in the navigation bar of the display shows
the current meaning. If the function keys are not labelled, it has no function in
the current situation.

Example:

With the left function key [Select] you start the edit mode of the element marked in the display, e.g.
to change a value.

With the right function key [Back] you leave the current screen. The screen active before is
displayed again.

Arrow keys
7091

4 arrow keys are used for navigation or for changing values.

Which keys can be activated in the current situation is shown in the
navigation compass in the centre of the navigation bar.

With the [] key you navigate step by step upwards in the displayed menu.
Or: The value to be edited is increased step by step.

With the [] key you navigate step by step downwards in the displayed menu.
Or: The value to be edited is decreased step by step.

With the [] key you navigate step by step to the left in the displayed menu.

With the [] key you navigate step by step to the left in the displayed menu.

51

ifm AS-Interface manual tips and tricks for users edition 2.1

2012-09-26

Device descriptions

Device description AS-i gateways (AC14nn)

Switch language
9137

Sequence from the start screen:

>

> tab [System settings] > group [Language]

Detailed description:

1.

Use [] or [] to switch to the symbol [System].

2.

Use [] > [] to switch to the symbol [Settings].

3.

[System settings]

Use the function key [Select] to go to tab [System

settings].

[Language]

4.

The menu screen [System settings] is displayed.

>

Focus is on the tab [System settings] .

Use several times [] to go to the group [Language]

button.

[English] []

5.

>

[Select]

>

Focus is on the listbox [Language].

>

The listbox shows the current language.

Use the function key [Select] to open the listbox

[Language].
>

A list of the possible languages opens.

The focus shows the current language.

Use [] or [] to mark the requested language.

6.

Use the function key [Select] to select the new language.

>

7.

[Accept selection]

The listbox shows the newly set language.

Use [] to mark the button [Accept selection].

Use the function key [Select] to activate the new
language.

8.

[Back] >

The change is immediately effective.

Use several times the function key [Back] to go to the start

screen.
>

52

That's it!

ifm AS-Interface manual tips and tricks for users edition 2.1

2012-09-26

Device descriptions

Device description AS-i gateways (AC14nn)

Display
11271
6954

The layout of the display contains the following basic elements ( following illustration):
Figure: Areas in the display (example: Profinet setup)

1 = info bar
2 = main navigation bar
3 = subnavigation bars
4 = working area
5 = navigation status bar
6 = navigation compass
7 = focus
8 = starting point navigation

The position and sizes of the info bar, main navigation bar, working area and navigation status line
elements cannot be changed.

53

ifm AS-Interface manual tips and tricks for users edition 2.1

2012-09-26

Device descriptions

Device description AS-i gateways (AC14nn)

Main navigation bar

6957

The main navigation bar is always visible. It is used for navigation via symbols.
>

The following symbols are displayed from left to right (if the respective option is available):

Symbol
quick setup

Meaning
This is a container for the primary device functions:

automatic adoption of the slave configuration

Project all

setting the operating modes

setting the fieldbus

setting the configuration interface

address the AS-i slaves

AS-i 1

AS-i line 1:
- master
- diagnosis
- slaves

AS-i 2 (optional)

AS-i line 2:
- master
- diagnosis
- slaves

system

system:
- information
- diagnosis
- settings

interfaces

interfaces:
- configuration interface
- fieldbus

>

All pictograms used are always displayed left-aligned within the main navigation bar and in the
sequence shown above.

>

When the system has been started, the main navigation bar is displayed without focus.

>

The first click on any key sets the focus to the first left symbol.
Exception: in the basic screen with the function key [Support] the device changes to the page
Online support center (OSC) ( page 241).

>

The focus can always be only on one single symbol.

Navigate within the main navigation bar using the [] / [] arrow keys.
>

54

Navigation is not scrolling. If a border symbol has the focus, it is not possible to navigate beyond
the border to get to the opposite border symbol.

ifm AS-Interface manual tips and tricks for users edition 2.1
Device descriptions

2012-09-26
Device description AS-i gateways (AC14nn)

Focus
6977

The focus is used for representing the navigation through the menus and pages.

Accept selection

The focus frames the marked symbol or control element which the current
operation of the device refers to.
top: the symbol [AS-i 1]
bottom: the button [Accept selection]

The focus is moved via the arrow keys.

>

During navigation only ONE symbol or control element can have the focus.

Navigation trail
6981

Each navigation step between the main navigation bar and the tab control element of a page is
marked by a navigation trail.
To recognise the navigation path there are two versions of each symbol.
symbol without navigation trail (light background)
this navigation element is not part of the navigation path
symbol with navigation trail (dark background)
this navigation element is part of the active navigation path
The starting point is the initial point of the navigation trail. The user is thus shown the navigation path
to a page.
Example:
symbol [AS-i 2] with navigation trail (dark background) becomes the starting
point of navigation in the main navigation bar.
The distance block connects the main navigation and subnavigation bars.
Here the symbol [master settings] in the subnavigation bar has the focus.

55

ifm AS-Interface manual tips and tricks for users edition 2.1
Device descriptions

2012-09-26
Device description AS-i gateways (AC14nn)

Subnavigation bars
6965

The subnavigation bars have the following features:

The subnavigation bar 1 is always displayed when the focus is on it or on a symbol of the main
navigation bar for which a submenu has been defined.

The subnavigation bar 2 is always displayed when the focus is on it or on a symbol of the
subnavigation bar 1 for which a submenu has been defined.

The subnavigation bars partially cover the working area.

Navigation is made via the symbols by means of the arrow keys.

The subnavigation bars change dynamically depending on the current menu structure.

Navigate within the subnavigation bar using the [] / [] arrow keys.

>

Navigation is not scrolling. If a border symbol has the focus, it is not possible to navigate beyond
the border to reach the opposite border symbol.

Symbols in the subnavigation bars

6966

Below an overview of the symbols in the subnavigation bars:

Symbol

56

Meaning

AS-i master

AS-i master settings

AS-i slaves

AS-i slaves

information

show information

settings

make settings

diagnosis

show diagnosis

configuration interface

configuration interface settings

fieldbus interface

Profinet interface settings

fieldbus interface

Profibus interface settings

ifm AS-Interface manual tips and tricks for users edition 2.1

2012-09-26

Device descriptions

4.2.6

Device description AS-i gateways (AC14nn)

Quick setup

Project all......................................................................................................................................58
Set operating mode ......................................................................................................................59
Profibus settings...........................................................................................................................60
Profinet settings............................................................................................................................61
Set the configuration interface .....................................................................................................63
Change addresses of individual AS-i slaves................................................................................65
7273

Symbol
quick setup

Meaning
This is a container for the primary device functions:

automatic adoption of the slave configuration

Project all

setting the operating modes

setting the fieldbus

setting the configuration interface

address the AS-i slaves

57

ifm AS-Interface manual tips and tricks for users edition 2.1

2012-09-26

Device descriptions

Device description AS-i gateways (AC14nn)

Project all
8973

The AS-i master always works with only those AS-i slaves that are in its list of projected slaves. As
soon as there are deviations, the AS-i master excludes this slave address from processing. Added
slaves are recognised but not integrated in the program sequence.
With [Project all] the AS-i master accepts the configuration of all AS-i slaves currently found in the bus
into its memory. This function is useful as soon as a change has been made in the AS-i network, e.g.:
- AS-i slave replaced with another profile than before
- dynamic change of attachments with own AS-i slaves
- static restructuring of the machine/plant
Sequence from the start screen:

> [Project all]

Detailed description:
Use [] or [] to switch to the symbol [Quick setup].

1.
2.
3.

[Project all]

Use [] to go to the tab [Project all] .

Use [] to go to the check box [AS-i master 1] .

AS-i master 1

Use the function key [Select] to activate the check box to

select this master.

4.

Use [] to go to the check box [AS-i master 2]

(Option)

Use the function key [Select] to activate the check box to

select this master.

AS-i master 2

5.

[Start projection process]

Use [] to go to button [Start projection process] .

Use the function key [Select] to start projecting.

6.
7.

>

[Back] Use several times the function key [Back] to go to the start
screen.
>

58

AS-i master accepts the found slaves (LDS) in the list of the
projected slaves (LPS).

That's it!

ifm AS-Interface manual tips and tricks for users edition 2.1

2012-09-26

Device descriptions

Device description AS-i gateways (AC14nn)

Set operating mode

8974

Sequence from the start screen

> tab [Operation modes]

Detailed description:
Use [] or [] to switch to the symbol [Quick setup].

1.
2.

[Project all]

Use [] to go to the tab [Project all] .

3.

[Operation modes]

Use [] to go to the tab [Operation modes] .

>

4.

5.

[AS-i master 1]

Display of the following groups:

group [AS-i master 1]

group [AS-i master 2] (Option)

group [Output access]

Use [] to go to the group [AS-i master 1] .

Mark the requested parameter with [] / [].
Activate or deactivate the parameter with function key
[Select] .
>

6.

Projection mode

The change is immediately effective.

= Projection mode
The configuration in the AS-i network can be projected.
= Protected mode
Normal mode; no projection is possible.

7.

No slave reset

= operating mode change without slave reset

After changing the operationg mode the AS-i slaves go on
working.
= operating mode change with slave reset
After changing the operationg mode the AS-i slaves make a
reset before they go on working.

8.

[AS-i master 2]

(option) ditto for AS-i master 2

9.

[Output access]

Choose from a list which instance is responsible to power the

outputs of the AS-i slaves, e.g.:
[Gateway]
= fieldbus master
[manual]
= HMI

[Gateway] []

Use [] to go to the group [Output access] .

10.

>

Focus is on the listbox [Output access] .

>

The listbox shows the current responsibility.

Example: [Gateway]

Use the button [Select] to open the listbox [Output access] .

>

List of the possible responsibilities opens.

The focus shows the current responsibility.
59

ifm AS-Interface manual tips and tricks for users edition 2.1

2012-09-26

Device descriptions

Device description AS-i gateways (AC14nn)

Use [] or [] to mark the requested responsibility.

11.

Use the function key [Select] to select new responsibility.

>

12.

[Accept selection]

The listbox shows the reset responsibility.

Use [] to mark the button [Accept selection] .

Activate the new responsibility with function key [Select] .

[Back] >

13.

The change is immediately effective.

Use several times the function key [Back] to go to the start

screen.
>

That's it!

Profibus settings
10917

Here you set the parameters of the Profibus fieldbus interface.

Sequence from the start screen:

> tab [Profibus]

Detailed description:
Use [] or [] to switch to the symbol [Quick setup].

1.
2.

[Project all]

Use [] to go to tab [Project all] .

3.

[Profibus]

Go to the tab [Profibus] with 2 times [].

>

4.

Displays the following groups:

Use [] to select the requested page.

5.
6.
7.

[Profibus address]
Address: 3
[Select]

10.

>

Displays the Profibus address of the AS-i master.

Use the function key [Select] to start the editing mode.

Use [] / [] to set the requested value.
Permissible values: 3...126

8.
9.

group [Profibus address]

[Select]

Use the function key [Select] to accept the change.

OR:
Use the function key [Back] to discard the change.
In both cases: exit the editing mode.
[Accept]

Use [] to go to the button [Accept] .

Use function key [Select] to activate the changes.

11.

[Back] Use several times the function key [Back] to go to the start
screen.
>

60

That's it!

ifm AS-Interface manual tips and tricks for users edition 2.1

2012-09-26

Device descriptions

Device description AS-i gateways (AC14nn)

Profinet settings
8976

Here you set the parameters of the fieldbus interface Profinet.

Sequence from the start screen:

> tab [Profinet]

Detailed description:
Use [] or [] to switch to the symbol [Quick setup].

1.
2.

[Project all]

Use [] to go to the tab [Project all] .

3.

[Profinet]

Go to the tab [Profinet] with 2 times [].

>

4.

Display of the following pages:

group [IP address]

group [Subnet mask]

group [Gateway address]

Use [] to select the requested page.

5.
6.

[IP address]

7.

[Subnet mask]

IP address of the AS-I master

Subnet mask
below

8.

[Gateway address]

9.

[Accept]

IP address of the router

Use [] to go to the button [Accept] .
Activate the change with the function key [Select] .

10.

[Back] Use several times the function key [Back] to go to the start
screen.
>

That's it!

61

ifm AS-Interface manual tips and tricks for users edition 2.1

2012-09-26

Device descriptions

Device description AS-i gateways (AC14nn)

Notes on the Ethernet rules

NOTE
In the Ethernet network every IP address MUST be unique.
The following IP addresses, however, are reserved for network-internal purposes and are therefore
not allowed as addresses for participants: nnn.nnn.nnn.0 and nnn.nnn.nnn.255.
Only network participants whose subnet mask is identical and whose IP addresses are identical with
respect to the subnet mask can communicate with each other.
Rule:
If part of the subnet mask = 255, the corresponding IP address parts must be identical.
If part of the subnet mask = 0, the corresponding IP address parts must be different.
If the subnet mask = 255.255.255.0, 254 participants communicating with each other are possible in
the network.
If the subnet mask = 255.255.0.0, 256x254 = 65 024 participants communicating with each other are
possible in the network.
In the same physical network different subnet masks of the participants are allowed. They form
different groups of participants which cannot communicate with groups of participants having other
subnet masks.
In case of doubt or problems please contact your system administrator.
Examples:
Participant A
IP address

Participant A
Subnet mask

Participant B
IP address

Participant B
Subnet mask

Communication of participants
possible?

192.168.82.247

255.255.255.0

192.168.82.10

255.255.255.0

yes, 254 participants possible

192.168.82.247

255.255.255.0

192.168.82.247

255.255.255.0

no (same IP address)

192.168.82.247

255.255.255.0

192.168.82.10

255.255.0.0

no (different subnet mask)

192.168.82.247

255.255.255.0

192.168.116.10

255.255.255.0

no (different IP address range:

82 116)

192.168.222.213

255.255.0.0

192.168.222.123

255.255.0.0

yes, 65 024 participants possible

192.168.111.213

255.255.0.0

192.168.222.123

255.255.0.0

yes, 65 024 participants possible

192.168.82.247

255.255.255.0

192.168.82.0

255.255.255.0

no, the whole network is disturbed

because the IP address nnn.nnn.nnn.0
is not allowed

62

ifm AS-Interface manual tips and tricks for users edition 2.1

2012-09-26

Device descriptions

Device description AS-i gateways (AC14nn)

Set the configuration interface

8991

Here you set the parameters of the Ethernet configuration interface (X3 port).
Sequence from the start screen:
> tab [Configuration interface]
Detailed description:
Use [] or [] to switch to the symbol [Quick setup].

1.
2.

[Project all]

Use [] to switch to the tab [Project all].

3.

[Configuration interface]

Use [] several times to switch to the tab [Configuration

interface].
>

4.

group [IP address]

group [Subnet mask]

group [Gateway address]

Use [] to select the requested page.

5.
6.

Display of the following groups:

[IP address]

>

Optain IP address autom.

check box [Optain IP address autom.]:

Display of the current setting.

= IP address indicated below is valid.

If a valid DHCP IP address has been indicated:

= The device will obtain the IP address from the
DHCP server.

If no DHCP server has been found:

= The IP address will be generated from the
following address range: 192.168.nnn.nnn
Subnet mask for this = 255.255.0.0

Activate or deactivate the parameter with function key

[Select] .
The change is immediately effective.

7.

IP status: Statisch

>

Display status of the IP connection:

"DHCP" =
DHCP = Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol
The device will obtain the IP address from the DHCP
server.

"Zeroconf" =
(Zero Configuration Networking)
The IP address will be generated from the following
address range: 192.168.nnn.nnn

"Static" =
The IP address is not obtained automatically. The
device statically uses the following IP address.

63

ifm AS-Interface manual tips and tricks for users edition 2.1

2012-09-26

Device descriptions

Device description AS-i gateways (AC14nn)

[IP address]
169 . 254 . 198 . 31

8.

[Subnet mask]
255 . 255 . 0 . 0

9.

IP address of the AS-i master

(change value IP address control element,
only possible if [Optain IP address autom.] =

Subnetzmaske
(change value IP address control element,
only possible if [Optain IP address autom.] =

below

10.

[Gateway address]
0.0.0.0

11.

[Accept]

IP-Adresse of the DHCP server

(change value IP address control element)
Use [] to go to button [Accept] .
Use [Select] to activate the changes.

[Back] Use several times the function key [Back] to go to the start
screen.

12.

>

That's it!

Notes on the Ethernet rules

NOTE
In the Ethernet network every IP address MUST be unique.
The following IP addresses, however, are reserved for network-internal purposes and are therefore
not allowed as addresses for participants: nnn.nnn.nnn.0 and nnn.nnn.nnn.255.
Only network participants whose subnet mask is identical and whose IP addresses are identical with
respect to the subnet mask can communicate with each other.
Rule:
If part of the subnet mask = 255, the corresponding IP address parts must be identical.
If part of the subnet mask = 0, the corresponding IP address parts must be different.
If the subnet mask = 255.255.255.0, 254 participants communicating with each other are possible in
the network.
If the subnet mask = 255.255.0.0, 256x254 = 65 024 participants communicating with each other are
possible in the network.
In the same physical network different subnet masks of the participants are allowed. They form
different groups of participants which cannot communicate with groups of participants having other
subnet masks.
In case of doubt or problems please contact your system administrator.

64

ifm AS-Interface manual tips and tricks for users edition 2.1

2012-09-26

Device descriptions

Device description AS-i gateways (AC14nn)

Examples:
Participant A
IP address

Participant A
Subnet mask

Participant B
IP address

Participant B
Subnet mask

Communication of participants
possible?

192.168.82.247

255.255.255.0

192.168.82.10

255.255.255.0

yes, 254 participants possible

192.168.82.247

255.255.255.0

192.168.82.247

255.255.255.0

no (same IP address)

192.168.82.247

255.255.255.0

192.168.82.10

255.255.0.0

no (different subnet mask)

192.168.82.247

255.255.255.0

192.168.116.10

255.255.255.0

no (different IP address range:

82 116)

192.168.222.213

255.255.0.0

192.168.222.123

255.255.0.0

yes, 65 024 participants possible

192.168.111.213

255.255.0.0

192.168.222.123

255.255.0.0

yes, 65 024 participants possible

192.168.82.247

255.255.255.0

192.168.82.0

255.255.255.0

no, the whole network is disturbed

because the IP address nnn.nnn.nnn.0
is not allowed

Change addresses of individual AS-i slaves

8992

Here you can change the addresses of individual AS-i slaves.

Sequence from the start screen:

> tab [Addressing AS-i 1] or [Addressing AS-i 2]

Detailed description:
Use [] or [] to switch to the symbol [Quick setup].

1.
2,

[Project all]

Use [] to go to the tab [Project all].

3.

[Addressing AS-i 1]

Use [] several times to go to the tab [Addressing AS-i 1]

or [Addressing AS-i 2] (option).

4.

[Overview slave status]

>

Display the [Overview slave status] page:

>

Display AS-i master operating mode:

= AS-i master in protected mode
= AS-i master in projection mode

Mark the slave address to be changed with [] / [].

Select this slave with function key [Select].

65

ifm AS-Interface manual tips and tricks for users edition 2.1

2012-09-26

Device descriptions

5.

[Overview free slave

addresses]

Device description AS-i gateways (AC14nn)

>

Display the [Overview free slave addresses] page:

>

Display AS-i master operating mode:

= AS-i master in protected mode
= AS-i master in projection mode

Use [] / [] to mark the requested target address to

which the AS-i slave is to be changed.
Use the function key [Select] to accept the new address.
>

6.

Display of safety query.

Confirm the change with function key [OK].

OR:
Cancel the change with function key [Cancel].
[Cancel] After function key [Cancel] :

7.

>

The [Overview free slave addresses] page is displayed to

select another address.

Continue with step 5

OR:

8.

[OK]

After function key [OK] :

>

The [Overview slave status] page is displayed.

If as a consequence of this measure the current configuration

does no longer correspond to the saved configuration:
>

9.

[Back] Use several times the function key [Back] to go to the start
screen.
>

66

Error message "Configuration error" appears.

That's it!

ifm AS-Interface manual tips and tricks for users edition 2.1
Device descriptions

4.3

2012-09-26
Device description AS-i power supplies (AC1216, AC1218, AC1223, AC1224, AC1226)

Device description AS-i power supplies

(AC1216, AC1218, AC1223, AC1224, AC1226)
Operating conditions, installation .................................................................................................67
Electrical connection (AC1216...).................................................................................................68
LED behaviour (AC12nn) .............................................................................................................70
6317

Examples:

AC1216

4.3.1

AC1218

Operating conditions, installation

6324

Protection IP 20.

Installation only in a condensation-free environment.

Avoid excessive dust, vibration and shock.
The air circulation through the vents must not be impeded. Recommended clear space:
Left / right: 15 mm in each direction,
Top / bottom: 25 mm in each direction.
Avoid installation in the direct vicinity of frequency inverters.

67

ifm AS-Interface manual tips and tricks for users edition 2.1
Device descriptions

4.3.2

2012-09-26
Device description AS-i power supplies (AC1216, AC1218, AC1223, AC1224, AC1226)

Electrical connection (AC1216...)

6325

Size of the back-up fuse (line protection) data sheet.

The AS-i power supplies have an integrated fuse serving exclusively for device protection. If this
internal fuse triggers, the device must be sent to the manufacturer for repair for security reasons.
If single wires are used for the AS-i connection in the control cabinet:
lay the wires as a twisted parallel pair to avoid e.g. current loops.
Connect the protective wire to the PE terminal (protective earth!). Do not operate the device
without protective wire! The PE terminal on the primary side of the AS-i power supply is internally
connected to the earthing screw and the housing.
The screws on the housing serve for internal earthing. Do not remove! Do not connect any cables
to them!
Connect Shield/Ground (GND) on the AS-i power supply to the machine ground so that the AS-i
system is symmetrically operated against this machine ground. This improves noise sensitivity in
case of symmetrical interference on the AS-i cable.
Check the voltage range of the network selection switch:
- 115 V AC (range 85...132 V AC)
- 230 V AC (range 184...264 V AC)
Fault:
The power supply does not start up, the
back-up fuse (line protection) triggers.

Cause:
The inrush current limitation is often implemented by an
NTC resistor. If a power supply operating under load is
briefly (a couple of seconds) switched off and on again,
the NTC is still of low resistance and so the starting
inrush current is almost indefinitely high.

Link for IR addressing

6326

Link at position 2-3 interrupts the AS-i data communication, IR addressing can be carried out.

Figure: Link on the AS-i power supply

1.

Switch off the AS-i power supply upon first setup of the AS-i slaves with IR interface (preset
address 0).

2.

Reposition the link to position 2-3.

3.

Switch the power supply on again and address the slaves.

4.

Reposition the link to position 1-2 for regular data communication.

IR addressing of the slaves chapter Infrared addressing ( page 105)

68

ifm AS-Interface manual tips and tricks for users edition 2.1
Device descriptions

2012-09-26
Device description AS-i power supplies (AC1216, AC1218, AC1223, AC1224, AC1226)

Integrated earth fault monitor (optional)

6327

Detection of asymmetrical earth faults, e.g. AS-i+ or AS-i- against Shield.

Relay output (GF ok) as normally closed contact
(Vswitching = 25 V AC or 60 V DC, max. 0.5 A).
Button [Test-Reset]:
pressed < 2 s = earth fault simulation,
pressed > 2 s = reset of the earth fault monitor.

Fuse mode (optional)

6328

Electronic fuse on the output.

Triggering in case of overload, short circuit and excess temperature.
Device switches off after 2...5 s.
Restart via reset button on the front.

Power supply for 8 A

6329

For use of an 8 A AS-i power supply please note the following:

The voltage drop along the AS-i line increases.

For orientation: If 2 A are transmitted via a 100 m long cable with 1.5 mm2 wire cross section, the
voltage drop is about 5 V.

When distributing the AS-i voltage (branch), note the current rating of the contacts for the
insulation displacement technology. Examples:
AC5000 flat cable lower part: 2 A
E70377 flat cable splitter: 8 A
E70381 flat cable splitter: 8 A

Core cross sections

11283

Type of cable

Max. core cross section [mm]

AWG

massive

0.56

2010

flexible

0.54

2012

69

ifm AS-Interface manual tips and tricks for users edition 2.1
Device descriptions

4.3.3

2012-09-26
Device description AS-i power supplies (AC1216, AC1218, AC1223, AC1224, AC1226)

LED behaviour (AC12nn)

6330

Diagnostic LEDs

LED
colour

LED off

LED lit

LED flashes

AS-i ok

green

AS-i overload

AS-i ok

---

COM off

red

---

IR addressing

---

Overload *)

red

---

---

fuse mode switches off the output

Ground Fault *)

red

---

earth fault

---

*) Option

70

ifm AS-Interface manual tips and tricks for users edition 2.1

2012-09-26

Device descriptions

4.4

Device description AS-i power supplies (AC1220, AC1221)

Device description AS-i power supplies

(AC1220, AC1221)
11276

Example:

AC1220

4.4.1

Operating conditions, installation

11277

Protection IP 20.

Installation only in a condensation-free environment.

Avoid excessive dust, vibration and shock.
The air circulation through the vents must not be impeded. Recommended clear space:
Left / right: 30 mm in each direction,
Top / bottom: 30 mm in each direction.
Avoid installation in the direct vicinity of frequency inverters.

4.4.2

Electrical connection
11279

Back-up fuse (line protection): external, 10 A, characteristic B.

The AS-i power supplies have an integrated fuse serving exclusively for device protection. If this
internal fuse triggers, the device must be sent to the manufacturer for repair for security reasons.
If single wires are used for the AS-i connection in the control cabinet:
lay the wires as a twisted parallel pair to avoid e.g. current loops.
Connect Shield/Ground (GND) on the AS-i power supply to the machine ground so that the AS-i
system is symmetrically operated against this machine ground. This improves noise sensitivity in
case of symmetrical interference on the AS-i cable.
Wide-range input: 100...240 V AC + 10 %
Fault:
The power supply does not start up, the
back-up fuse (line protection) triggers.

Cause:
The inrush current limitation is often implemented by an
NTC resistor. If a power supply operating under load is
briefly (a couple of seconds) switched off and on again,
the NTC is still of low resistance and so the starting inrush
current is almost indefinitely high.

71

ifm AS-Interface manual tips and tricks for users edition 2.1

2012-09-26

Device descriptions

Device description AS-i power supplies (AC1220, AC1221)

Core cross sections

11281

4.4.3

Type of wire

Max. core cross section [mm]

AWG

massive

1.5

16

flexible

1.5 (with wire end ferrule)

---

Output response
11284

In case of short-circuit or overload of the output the output voltage is regulated down at constant
maximum current.

72

ifm AS-Interface manual tips and tricks for users edition 2.1
Device descriptions

4.5

2012-09-26
Device description AS-i power supplies (AC1236, AC1244)

Device description AS-i power supplies

(AC1236, AC1244)
11275

Example:

AC1236

4.5.1

Operating conditions, installation

11273

Protection IP 20.

Installation only in a condensation-free environment.

Avoid excessive dust, vibration and shock.
The air circulation through the vents must not be impeded. Recommended clear space:
Left / right: 20 mm in each direction,
Top / bottom: 20 mm in each direction.
Avoid installation in the direct vicinity of frequency inverters.

4.5.2

Electrical connection
11280

Back-up fuse (line protection): external, 10 A, characteristic B.

The AS-i power supplies have an integrated fuse serving exclusively for device protection. If this
internal fuse triggers, the device must be sent to the manufacturer for repair for security reasons.
If single wires are used for the AS-i connection in the control cabinet:
lay the wires as a twisted parallel pair to avoid e.g. current loops.
Connect the protective wire to the PE terminal (protective earth!). Do not operate the device
without protective wire! The PE terminal on the primary side of the AS-i power supply is internally
connected to the earthing screw and the housing.
The screw on the housing serves for internal earthing. Do not remove! Do not connect any cables
to it!
Connect Shield/Ground (GND) on the AS-i power supply to the machine ground so that the AS-i
system is symmetrically operated against this machine ground. This improves noise sensitivity in
case of symmetrical interference on the AS-i cable.

73

ifm AS-Interface manual tips and tricks for users edition 2.1

2012-09-26

Device descriptions

Device description AS-i power supplies (AC1236, AC1244)

Do not use unmarked terminals.

Tightening torque for all terminals 0.5...0.6 Nm.
Wide-range input: 100...240 V AC + 10 %
Fault:
The power supply does not start up, the
back-up fuse (line protection) triggers.

Cause:
The inrush current limitation is often implemented by an
NTC resistor. If a power supply operating under load is
briefly (a couple of seconds) switched off and on again,
the NTC is still of low resistance and so the starting inrush
current is almost indefinitely high.

Core cross sections

11282

Connection

Type of wire

Max. core cross section [mm]

AWG

AC

massive

0.26

2410

AC

flexible

0.24
with wire end ferrule: 0.254

---

DC

massive

0.26

2410

DC

flexible

0.24
with wire end ferrule: 0.254

---

4.5.3

Output response
11284

In case of short-circuit or overload of the output the output voltage is regulated down at constant
maximum current.

74

ifm AS-Interface manual tips and tricks for users edition 2.1
Device descriptions

4.6

2012-09-26
Device description control cabinet modules SmartLine (AC22nn)

Device description control cabinet modules

SmartLine (AC22nn)
Operating conditions, installation .................................................................................................75
Electrical connection ....................................................................................................................76
Addressing ...................................................................................................................................76
Connecting analogue periphery (AC2216...AC2220)...................................................................77
Fehler! Verweisquelle konnte nicht gefunden werden..... Fehler! Textmarke nicht definiert.
6332

Examples:

AC2250

4.6.1

AC2258

Operating conditions, installation

6335

Protection IP 20.

Installation only in a condensation-free environment.

Avoid excessive dust, vibration and shock.
Avoid installation in the direct vicinity of frequency inverters or inductive loads.

75

ifm AS-Interface manual tips and tricks for users edition 2.1

2012-09-26

Device descriptions

4.6.2

Device description control cabinet modules SmartLine (AC22nn)

Electrical connection
6342

Disconnect the installation from power before connecting the modules to the periphery.
Supply all the outputs (relays) with the same voltage (e.g. 240 V AC or 24 V DC).
Exception for AC2258 and AC2259:
Supply the outputs (relays) O1 and O2 as well as O3 and O4 in pairs with the same voltage (e.g.
2x 240 V AC or 2x 24 V DC).
Do not connect the inputs to an external potential when these are supplied from the AS-i voltage.
The connections are internally
connected

External connection

AC2251,
AC2252,
AC2267

E- to O-

not useful

---

AC2254,
AC2255,
AC2259

E- to I-

not useful

The sensors must be supplied

via an external PELV voltage
source.

AC2257,
AC2267

E- to I- and O-

not useful

The sensors must be supplied

via an external PELV voltage
source.

AC2264

E- to O-

not useful

---

Device

4.6.3

Note

Addressing
6343

When mounted and wired, the module can be addressed with the addressing cable E70213 via the
integrated addressing interface.

NOTICE
A connector other than the ifm jack plug E70213 can destroy the addressing socket!
Non ifm connectors (other than ifm article E70213) can cause short-circuits or irreparable
deformations of the socket contacts, resulting in a damaged addressing socket. As a consequence the
device can no longer communicate since it is permanently separated from the AS-i bus.
For addressing only use the ifm jack plug E70213!
If a slave is used with the ID code "A" (extended address mode enabled) combined with a master of
the 1st generation (version 2.0) then:

76

Set parameter P3=1.

Set output bit D3=0.
The output bit D3 must not be used.

Assign an address of 1A...31A to this slave.

ifm AS-Interface manual tips and tricks for users edition 2.1
Device descriptions

4.6.4

2012-09-26
Device description control cabinet modules SmartLine (AC22nn)

Connecting analogue periphery (AC2216...AC2220)

Analogue inputs 4...20 mA (AC2216)...........................................................................................78

Analogue inputs 0...10 V (AC2217)..............................................................................................79
Parameter setting (AC2216, AC2217) .........................................................................................80
Measuring range (AC2216)..........................................................................................................80
Measuring range (AC2217)..........................................................................................................80
Analogue temperature measurement Pt100 (AC2220)................................................................81
Parameter setting (AC2220) ........................................................................................................82
Measuring range (AC2220)..........................................................................................................82
Analogue outputs 0...20 mA (AC2218) ........................................................................................83
Analogue outputs 0...10 V (AC2219) ...........................................................................................84
Parameter setting (AC2218, AC2219) .........................................................................................85
Measuring range (AC2218)..........................................................................................................85
Measuring range (AC2219)..........................................................................................................85
6485

77

ifm AS-Interface manual tips and tricks for users edition 2.1
Device descriptions

2012-09-26
Device description control cabinet modules SmartLine (AC22nn)

Analogue inputs 4...20 mA (AC2216)

6568

Wiring 2-wire sensor without own supply

Connect the terminals I- and 0V to each other

via an external link.

Wiring 3-wire sensor without own supply

Connect the terminals I- and 0V to each other

via an external link.

Wiring 4-wire sensor without own supply

Wiring analogue sensor with own supply

External supply PELV ungrounded

78

ifm AS-Interface manual tips and tricks for users edition 2.1
Device descriptions

2012-09-26
Device description control cabinet modules SmartLine (AC22nn)

Analogue inputs 0...10 V (AC2217)

6569

Wiring 3-wire sensor without own supply

Connect the terminals I- and 0V to each other

via an external link.

Wiring 4-wire sensor without own supply

Wiring analogue sensor with own supply

External supply PELV ungrounded

79

ifm AS-Interface manual tips and tricks for users edition 2.1

2012-09-26

Device descriptions

Device description control cabinet modules SmartLine (AC22nn)

Parameter setting (AC2216, AC2217)

6478

Parameter bit Designation

Description

P0

0 = 60 Hz filter is active

filter for A/D converter

1 = 50 Hz filter is active (for the whole of Europe)

P1,
P2

channel activation

P3

indication of periphery faults

P1

P2

channel
1

channel
2

channel
3

channel
4

on

off

off

off

on

on

off

off

on

on

on

off

on

on

on

on

0 = periphery fault indication is not active

1 = periphery fault indication is active

Changing slave parameter data ( page 41)

Measuring range (AC2216)

11289

Analogue input module, nominal range = 4...20 mA

Range
[mA]

Units
[dec]

Units
[hex]

LED yellow
I1I4

Meaning

<1

32767

7FFF

flashes

wire break

13.999

10003999

03E80F9F

lights

below nominal range

420

400020000

0FA04E20

lights

nominal range

20.00123

2000123000

4E2159D8

lights

overcontrol

> 23

32767

7FFF

flashes

overflow

Measuring range (AC2217)

11290

Analogue input module, nominal range = 0...10 V

80

Range
[V]

Units
[dec]

Units
[hex]

LED yellow
I1I4

Meaning

<0

0000

lights

outside range

010

010000

00002710

lights

nominal range

10.00111.5

1000111500

27112CEC

lights

overcontrol

> 11.5

32767

7FFF

flashes

overflow

ifm AS-Interface manual tips and tricks for users edition 2.1
Device descriptions

2012-09-26
Device description control cabinet modules SmartLine (AC22nn)

Analogue temperature measurement Pt100 (AC2220)

6588

Wiring 2-wire Pt100 sensor

Wiring 4-wire Pt100 sensor

For modules with Pt100 inputs:

Connect at least one Pt100 sensor prior to switching on the AS-i slave, to start the A/D converter.
Otherwise there will be an error message: LEDs I1...I4 flashing at 5 Hz.
Important notes on Pt100 measurements

With the Pt100 measuring method, very low currents flow into the measuring electronics.

4-wire Pt100 sensors provide more precise results than 2-wire sensors. For 2-wire measurement,
all contact resistances and connection resistances add up by measurement and can massively
falsify the measurement result.

The changeover between 2- wire and 4-wire sensors is made via the parameter bit P3.
Avoid additional resistance (conductors, contact and transfer resistance, loose contacts, etc.) in
the measuring circuit! This ensures a precise measurement.
Use high-quality connectors for the AS-i Pt100 module. Prefer prewired and potted connectors
with gold-plated contacts.

81

ifm AS-Interface manual tips and tricks for users edition 2.1

2012-09-26

Device descriptions

Device description control cabinet modules SmartLine (AC22nn)

Parameter setting (AC2220)

6551

Parameter bit Designation

Description

P0

0 = 60 Hz filter is active

filter for A/D converter

1 = 50 Hz filter is active (for the whole of Europe)

P1,
P2

periphery fault is detected by

channel...

P3

Pt100 sensor type

P1

P2

channel
1

channel
2

channel
3

channel
4

yes

no

no

no

yes

yes

no

no

yes

yes

yes

no

yes

yes

yes

yes

0 = 4-wire mode
1 = 2-wire mode

The parameter bits P1 and P2 define which measuring channels can trigger a periphery fault
message. But irrespective of the defined parameters all 4 channels are always transferred via the ASInterface.
Changing slave parameter data ( page 41)

Measuring range (AC2220)

11291

Pt100 module, nominal range = -200...+850 C

Range
[C]

Units
[dec]

Units
[hex]

LED yellow
I1I4

Meaning

< -219.4

32767

7FFF

flashes

short circuit

-219.4-200.1

-2194-2001

F76EF82F

lights

below nominal range

-200+850

-20008500

F8302134

lights

nominal range

+850.1+883.6

85018836

21352284

lights

overcontrol

> +883.6

32767

7FFF

out

wire break

82

ifm AS-Interface manual tips and tricks for users edition 2.1
Device descriptions

2012-09-26
Device description control cabinet modules SmartLine (AC22nn)

Analogue outputs 0...20 mA (AC2218)

6579

Wiring actuator without separate voltage supply

Wiring actuator with own voltage supply

External supply PELV ungrounded

Wiring actuator with separate voltage supply

83

ifm AS-Interface manual tips and tricks for users edition 2.1

2012-09-26

Device descriptions

Device description control cabinet modules SmartLine (AC22nn)

Additional note for the current output AC2nn8:

Do not connect the terminal [analogue output 0V] of the respective channels of the current output
module to each other!
The connection can e.g. also be made when connecting a multi-channel frequency inverter.
>

This connection leads to faulty current signals. Reason: A parallel connection of the internal
resistances is established by connecting the terminal [analogue output 0V]:

Solution: Use of two current output modules.

When using voltage output modules the 0V terminals can be connected.

Analogue outputs 0...10 V (AC2219)

6580

Wiring actuator with own voltage supply

External supply PELV ungrounded

Wiring actuator with own voltage supply

Connect the terminals O- and 0V to each other

via an external link.

84

ifm AS-Interface manual tips and tricks for users edition 2.1

2012-09-26

Device descriptions

Device description control cabinet modules SmartLine (AC22nn)

Parameter setting (AC2218, AC2219)

6586

Parameter
bit

Designation

Description

P0

not used

reserved

P1

not used

reserved

P2

periphery fault

0 = periphery fault not active

1 = periphery fault active

P3

not used

reserved

Changing slave parameter data ( page 41)

Measuring range (AC2218)

11292

Analogue output module, nominal range = 0...20 mA

Range
[mA]

Units
[dec]

Units
[hex]

LED yellow
O1O4

Meaning

020

020000

00004E20

lights

nominal range

20.00123

2000123000

4E2159D8

lights

overcontrol

> 23

> 23000

> 59D8

flashes

overflow

Measuring range (AC2219)

11293

Analogue output module, nominal range = 0...10 V

Range
[V]

Units
[dec]

Units
[hex]

LED yellow
O1O4

Meaning

010

010000

00002710

lights

nominal range

10.00111.5

1000111500

2711...2CEC

lights

overcontrol

> 11.5

> 11500

> 2CEC

flashes

overflow

85

ifm AS-Interface manual tips and tricks for users edition 2.1

2012-09-26

Device descriptions

Device description control cabinet modules SmartLine (AC22nn)

4.6.5

LED behaviour (AC2216...AC2220)

6786

LED behaviour of the digital modules

6808

Diagnostic LED

Description

[AS-i]

green

lights

AS-i voltage supply present

[AUX]

green

lights

external voltage supply present 24 V DC

[I1]...[I4]
[O1]...[O4]

yellow

lights

binary input/output is switched on

[FAULT]

red

lights

AS-i communication error, e.g. slave address = 0

flashes

periphery fault **)

**) Indication periphery fault in the following cases:

- Lacking auxiliary voltage (only where the inputs of the modules are supplied via AUX)
- Overload etc.

86

ifm AS-Interface manual tips and tricks for users edition 2.1

2012-09-26

Device descriptions

Device description control cabinet modules SmartLine (AC22nn)

LED behaviour (AC2216, AC2217)

6419

Diagnostic LED

Description

[AS-i]

green

lights

AS-i voltage supply present

[AUX]

green

lights

external voltage supply present 24 V DC

off

internal diagnosis: fault (replace module)

lights

internal diagnosis: no fault

flashes

internal diagnosis: fault (replace module)

[DIAG]

yellow

LED behaviour (AC2216)

6778

Diagnostic LED

Description

[I-1]...[I-4]

yellow

[I-2]...[I-4]

yellow

[FAULT]

red

lights

analogue signal in the measuring range

flashes

analogue signal outside the measuring range (overflow), no sensor

connected or wire break

off

no sensor connected (at least one LED flashes, because not all channels
can be deactivated via the parameter bit P1/P2 (channel activation)
(channel 1 is always activated))

lights

AS-i communication error, e.g. slave address = 0

flashes

periphery fault **)

**) Indication periphery fault in the following cases:

- At least one of the analogue signals is outside of the value range.
- Nothing connected to at least one analogue channel, although the respective channel is activated.
- There is a wire break.

LED behaviour (AC2217)

6783

Diagnostic LED

[I-1]...[I-4]

Description

yellow

[I-2]...[I-4]

yellow

[FAULT]

red

lights

the respective channel is activated

analogue signal in the measuring range or no sensor connected (it cannot
be differentiated whether the 0 V signal is applied or whether no sensor is
connected)

flashes

analogue signal outside the measuring range (outside range)

off

the respective channel is not activated

(channel 1 is always activated)

lights

AS-i communication error, e.g. slave address = 0

flashes

periphery fault **)

**) Indication periphery fault in the following cases:

- At least one of the analogue signals is outside of the value range.

87

ifm AS-Interface manual tips and tricks for users edition 2.1

2012-09-26

Device descriptions

Device description control cabinet modules SmartLine (AC22nn)

LED behaviour (AC2220)

6788

Diagnostic LED
[AS-i]

[I1]...[I4]

[FAULT]

Description
green

yellow

red

lights

AS-i voltage supply present

lights

analogue signal in the measuring range

flashes

analogue signal outside the measuring range

off

no sensor connected

lights

AS-i communication error, e.g. slave address = 0

flashes

periphery fault **)

**) Indication periphery fault in the following cases:

- At least one of the analogue signals is outside of the value range.
- Nothing connected to at least one analogue channel, although the respective channel is activated.

LED behaviour (AC2218, AC2219)

6787

Diagnostic LED

Description

[AS-i]

green

lights

AS-i voltage supply present

[AUX]

green

lights

external voltage supply present 24 V DC

off

internal diagnosis: fault (replace module)

[DIAG]

yellow

[O1]...[O4]

[FAULT]

yellow

red

lights

internal diagnosis: no fault

flashes

internal diagnosis: fault (replace module)

lights

analogue signal within the measuring range or no actuator connected

it cannot be differentiated whether the 0V/0mA signal is applied or
whether no actuator is connected

flashes

analogue signal outside the measuring range (outside range)

lights

AS-i communication error, e.g. slave address = 0

flashes

periphery fault **)

**) Indication periphery fault in the following cases:

- At least one of the analogue signals is outside of the value range.

88

ifm AS-Interface manual tips and tricks for users edition 2.1
Device descriptions

4.7

2012-09-26
Device description cabinet modules

Device description cabinet modules

6447

Example:

AC2704

4.7.1

Operating conditions, installation

6335

Protection IP 20.

Installation only in a condensation-free environment.

Avoid excessive dust, vibration and shock.
Avoid installation in the direct vicinity of frequency inverters or inductive loads.

4.7.2

Electrical connection
6469

Disconnect the installation from power before connecting the modules to the periphery.
Digital modules: Do NOT connect the inputs to an external potential, when the inputs are supplied
from the AS-i voltage.
For the outputs O1...O4 the external potential must be a PELV voltage.

89

ifm AS-Interface manual tips and tricks for users edition 2.1

2012-09-26

Device descriptions

Device description cabinet modules

4.7.3

Addressing
6691

For modules with addressing plug (jumper):

Connect the module to the addressing unit via the terminals A+ and A-. Pull the plug prior to
addressing and place the plug on only one pin (= parking position) after carrying out the
addressing.
Automatic addressing of several modules via the ControllerE or the gateway (to do so, activate
[Address Slave] > [Easy Startup] in the menu):
Pull the addressing plug on the first module, then on the second module, etc.
The modules are addressed in ascending order.
If a slave is used with the ID code "A" (extended address mode enabled) combined with a master of
the 1st generation (version 2.0) then:

Set parameter P3=1.

Set output bit D3=0.
The output bit D3 must not be used.

Assign an address of 1A...31A to this slave.

4.7.4

LED behaviour (AC27nn)

6455

Diagnostic LED

Description

[PWR]

green

lights

AS-i voltage supply present

[I1]...[I4]
[O1]...[O4]

yellow

lights

binary input/output is switched on

[ERR]

red

lights

short circuit or overload

the output switches off
reset (after rectification of the fault) by switching the external voltage
supply for the actuators off and on again

[AUX]

green

lights

external voltage supply present 24 V DC

90

ifm AS-Interface manual tips and tricks for users edition 2.1
Device descriptions

4.8

2012-09-26
Device description universal modules (AC20nn, AC26nn)

Device description universal modules (AC20nn,

AC26nn)
Operating conditions, installation .................................................................................................91
Electrical connection ....................................................................................................................91
Addressing ...................................................................................................................................92
Connecting analogue periphery (AC2616...AC2620)...................................................................92
LED behaviour (AC2032, AC2035, AC2616...AC2620)............................................................ 101
6452

Example:

AC2620

4.8.1

Operating conditions, installation

6471

Protection IP 65

Mount the module on a wired module lower part of the AS-i network, tightening torque 0.8 Nm.
Avoid installation in the direct vicinity of frequency inverters.
Use an FC-E lower part (article no. AC5003, AC5011) if supply is to be made from the external 24
V supply.

4.8.2

Electrical connection
6473

Disconnect the installation from power before connecting the modules to the periphery.
Use an FC-E lower part (article no. AC5003, AC5011) if supply is to be made from the external 24
V supply.
Digital modules:
Do NOT connect the inputs to an external potential, because the inputs are supplied from the AS-i
voltage.

91

ifm AS-Interface manual tips and tricks for users edition 2.1
Device descriptions

4.8.3

2012-09-26
Device description universal modules (AC20nn, AC26nn)

Addressing
6476

When you use module lower parts without an addressing socket (AC5000 or AC5003) first
address the module by placing it onto an addressing unit (AC1144) and assign a free address
between 1 and 31.
When you use module lower parts with an addressing socket (AC5010, AC5011) the modules can
be addressed with the addressing adapter E70213 later on.

4.8.4

Connecting analogue periphery (AC2616...AC2620)

Analogue inputs 4...20 mA (AC2616)...........................................................................................93

Analogue inputs 0...10 V (AC2617)..............................................................................................94
Parameter setting (AC2616, AC2617) .........................................................................................95
Measuring range (AC2616)..........................................................................................................95
Measuring range (AC2617)..........................................................................................................95
Analogue temperature measurement Pt100 (AC2620)................................................................96
Parameter setting (AC2620) ........................................................................................................97
Measuring range (AC2620)..........................................................................................................97
Analogue outputs 0...20 mA (AC2618) ........................................................................................98
Analogue outputs 0...10 V (AC2619) ...........................................................................................99
Parameter setting (AC2618, AC2619) ...................................................................................... 100
Measuring range (AC2218)....................................................................................................... 100
Measuring range (AC2619)....................................................................................................... 100
6489

Disconnect the installation from power before connecting the modules to the periphery.
If a total of over 90 mA is needed for the sensor supply, the supply must be from an external 24 V
PELV voltage source.
Use an FC-E lower part (article no. AC5003, AC5011) if supply is to be made from the external 24
V supply.
Select the type of supply via links inside the module:

To select the voltage supply the position of the links may only be changed when the module is
disconnected!

Switch off the module supply and open the module by removing the screws. Remove the
module cover. The links for the supply selection are now freely accessible.

Place the links as follows:

Periphery supply from AS-i OR:
Periphery supply from an external 24 V PELV voltage source

92

ifm AS-Interface manual tips and tricks for users edition 2.1
Device descriptions

2012-09-26
Device description universal modules (AC20nn, AC26nn)

Analogue inputs 4...20 mA (AC2616)

6592

On delivery, the analogue input module with 2 current inputs is equipped with a resistor between the
terminals I+ and C2 and with a link between the terminals I- and COM2. Due to this, no error message
is displayed by the module when it is set up with only one connected sensor.
Wiring 2-wire sensor without own supply

Connect the terminals I- and COM1/COM2 to

each other via an external link.

Wiring 3-wire sensor without own supply

Connect the terminals I- and COM1/COM2 to

each other via an external link.

Wiring 4-wire sensor without own supply

Wiring analogue sensor with own supply

External supply PELV ungrounded

93

ifm AS-Interface manual tips and tricks for users edition 2.1
Device descriptions

2012-09-26
Device description universal modules (AC20nn, AC26nn)

Analogue inputs 0...10 V (AC2617)

6597

Wiring 3-wire sensor without own supply

Connect the terminals I- and COM1/COM2 to

each other via an external link.

Wiring 4-wire sensor without own supply

Wiring analogue sensor with own supply

External supply PELV ungrounded

94

ifm AS-Interface manual tips and tricks for users edition 2.1

2012-09-26

Device descriptions

Device description universal modules (AC20nn, AC26nn)

Parameter setting (AC2616, AC2617)

6567

Parameter bit Designation

Description

P0

0 = 60 Hz filter is active

filter for A/D converter

1 = 50 Hz filter is active (for the whole of Europe)

P1

activate channel 2 *)

0 = channel 2 not activated

1 = channel 2 activated

P2

indication of periphery faults

0 = periphery fault indication is not active

1 = periphery fault indication is active

P3

not used

reserved

*) Configuration has an effect on the conversion time in the AS-i slave, the transmission via the ASInterface, the LED function and the periphery fault messages.
By disabling channel 2 the conversion time in the slave can be reduced considerably. LED indication
and periphery fault messages are then no longer influenced by this channel.
Changing slave parameter data ( page 41)

Measuring range (AC2616)

11294

Analogue input module, nominal range = 4...20 mA

Range
[mA]

Units
[dec]

Units
[hex]

LED yellow
I1I4

Meaning

<1

32767

7FFF

out

wire break

13.999

10003999

03E80F9F

lights

below nominal range

420

400020000

0FA04E20

lights

nominal range

20.00123

2000123000

4E2159D8

lights

overcontrol

> 23

32767

7FFF

flashes

overflow

Measuring range (AC2617)

11295
11290

Analogue input module, nominal range = 0...10 V

Range
[V]

Units
[dec]

Units
[hex]

LED yellow
I1I4

Meaning

<0

0000

lights

outside range

010

010000

00002710

lights

nominal range

10.00111.5

1000111500

27112CEC

lights

overcontrol

> 11.5

32767

7FFF

flashes

overflow

95

ifm AS-Interface manual tips and tricks for users edition 2.1
Device descriptions

2012-09-26
Device description universal modules (AC20nn, AC26nn)

Analogue temperature measurement Pt100 (AC2620)

6609

Wiring 2-wire Pt100 sensor

Wiring 3-wire Pt100 sensor

For modules with Pt100 inputs:

Connect at least one Pt100 sensor prior to switching on the AS-i slave, to start the A/D converter.
Otherwise there will be an error message: LEDs I1...I4 flashing at 5 Hz.
Important notes on Pt100 measurements

The terminals CH1+...CH4+ are interconnected in the module.

On delivery, an external resistor is placed between the terminals Ch2+ and Ch2-, Ch3+ and Ch3as well as Ch4+ and Ch4- so that no error message is indicated by the module when it is operated
with only one sensor being connected.

With the Pt100 measuring method, very low currents flow into the measuring electronics.

3-wire Pt100 sensors supply more exact results than 2-wire sensors provided that the wire
resistance is the same. For 2-wire measurement, all contact resistances and connection
resistances add up by measurement and can massively falsify the measurement result.

The changeover between 2-wire and 3-wire sensors is made via the parameter bit P3.
Avoid additional resistance (conductors, contact and transfer resistance, loose contacts, etc.) in
the measuring circuit! This ensures a precise measurement.

96

ifm AS-Interface manual tips and tricks for users edition 2.1

2012-09-26

Device descriptions

Device description universal modules (AC20nn, AC26nn)

Parameter setting (AC2620)

6793

Parameter bit Designation

Description

P0

0 = 60 Hz filter is active

filter for A/D converter

1 = 50 Hz filter is active (for the whole of Europe)

P1,
P2

periphery fault is detected by

channel...

P3

Pt100 sensor type

P1

P2

channel
1

channel
2

channel
3

channel
4

yes

no

no

no

yes

yes

no

no

yes

yes

yes

no

yes

yes

yes

yes

0 = 3-wire mode
1 = 2-wire mode

The parameter bits P1 and P2 define which measuring channels can trigger a periphery fault
message. But irrespective of the defined parameters all 4 channels are always transferred via the ASInterface.
Changing slave parameter data ( page 41)

Measuring range (AC2620)

11296
11291

Pt100 module, nominal range = -200...+850 C

Range
[C]

Units
[dec]

Units
[hex]

LED yellow
I1I4

Meaning

< -219.4

32767

7FFF

flashes

short circuit

-219.4-200.1

-2194-2001

F76EF82F

lights

below nominal range

-200+850

-20008500

F8302134

lights

nominal range

+850.1+883.6

85018836

21352284

lights

overcontrol

> +883.6

32767

7FFF

out

wire break

97

ifm AS-Interface manual tips and tricks for users edition 2.1
Device descriptions

2012-09-26
Device description universal modules (AC20nn, AC26nn)

Analogue outputs 0...20 mA (AC2618)

6602

Wiring actuator without separate voltage supply

Wiring actuator with own voltage supply

External supply PELV ungrounded

Wiring actuator with separate voltage supply

98

ifm AS-Interface manual tips and tricks for users edition 2.1

2012-09-26

Device descriptions

Device description universal modules (AC20nn, AC26nn)

Additional note for the current output AC2nn8:

Do not connect the terminal [analogue output 0V] of the respective channels of the current output
module to each other!
The connection can e.g. also be made when connecting a multi-channel frequency inverter.
>

This connection leads to faulty current signals. Reason: A parallel connection of the internal
resistances is established by connecting the terminal [analogue output 0V]:

Solution: Use of two current output modules.

When using voltage output modules the 0V terminals can be connected.

Analogue outputs 0...10 V (AC2619)

6606

Wiring actuator with own voltage supply

External supply PELV ungrounded

Wiring actuator with separate voltage supply

99

ifm AS-Interface manual tips and tricks for users edition 2.1

2012-09-26

Device descriptions

Device description universal modules (AC20nn, AC26nn)

Parameter setting (AC2618, AC2619)

6586

Parameter
bit

Designation

Description

P0

not used

reserved

P1

not used

reserved

P2

periphery fault

0 = periphery fault not active

1 = periphery fault active

P3

not used

reserved

Changing slave parameter data ( page 41)

Measuring range (AC2218)

11297

Analogue output module, nominal range = 0...20 mA

Range
[mA]

Units
[dec]

Units
[hex]

LED yellow
O1O4

Meaning

<0

<0

< 0000

flashes

outside range

020

020000

00004E20

lights

nominal range

20.00123

2000123000

4E2159D8

lights

overcontrol

> 23

> 23000

> 59D8

flashes

overflow

Measuring range (AC2619)

11298

Analogue output module, nominal range = 0...10 V

Range
[V]

Units
[dec]

Units
[hex]

LED yellow
O1O4

Meaning

<0

<0

< 0000

flashes

outside range

010

010000

00002710

lights

nominal range

10.00111.5

1000111500

2711...2CEC

lights

overcontrol

> 11.5

> 11500

> 2CEC

flashes

overflow

100

ifm AS-Interface manual tips and tricks for users edition 2.1

2012-09-26

Device descriptions

Device description universal modules (AC20nn, AC26nn)

4.8.5

LED behaviour (AC2032, AC2035, AC2616...AC2620)

6460

LED behaviour (AC2032)

6795

Diagnostic LED
[1]...[4]

[PWR / ERR]

Description
yellow

lights

binary input/output is switched on

green

lights

AS-i voltage supply present

red

lights

AS-i communication error, e.g. slave address = 0

red / green

flashes
alternately

periphery fault, e.g. sensor supply overloaded or shorted

LED behaviour (AC2035)

6796

Diagnostic LED
[AE]
[1]...[4]

[PWR / ERR]

Description
green

lights

external voltage supply present

yellow

lights

binary input/output is switched on

green

lights

AS-i voltage supply present

red

lights

AS-i communication error, e.g. slave address = 0

red / green

flashes
alternately

periphery fault, e.g. sensor supply overloaded or shorted

LED behaviour (AC2616, AC2617)

6797

Diagnostic LED
[Analog 1] /
[Analog 2]

Description
yellow

lights

analogue signal in the measuring range

flashes

analogue signal outside the measuring range

off

no sensor connected or wire break

[AD-Power]

green

lights

supply voltage for the A/D converter present *)

[AS-i]

green

lights

AS-i voltage supply present

[FAULT]

red

lights

AS-i communication error, e.g. slave address = 0

flashes

periphery fault **)

*) The LED signals the status of the voltage from which the actuator is supplied, i.e. it depends on the selected link position.
**) Indication periphery fault in the following cases:
- At least one of the analogue signals is outside of the value range.
- Nothing connected to at least one analogue channel, although the respective channel is activated.

101

ifm AS-Interface manual tips and tricks for users edition 2.1

2012-09-26

Device descriptions

Device description universal modules (AC20nn, AC26nn)

LED behaviour (AC2618, AC2619)

6798

Diagnostic LED

Description

[Analog 1] /
[Analog 2]

yellow

lights

analogue signal in the nominal range

flashes

analogue signal outside the nominal range

[AD-Power]

green

lights

supply voltage for the A/D converter present *)

[AS-i]

green

lights

AS-i voltage supply present

[FAULT]

red

lights

AS-i communication error, e.g. slave address = 0

flashes

periphery fault **)

*) The LED signals the status of the voltage from which the actuator is supplied, i.e. it depends on the selected link position.
**) Indication periphery fault in the following cases:
- At least one of the analogue signals is outside of the value range.

LED behaviour (AC2620)

6799

Diagnostic LED

Description

[Analog 1]...
[Analog 4]

yellow

[AS-i]

green

[FAULT]

red

lights

analogue signal in the measuring range

flashes

analogue signal outside the measuring range

lights

AS-i voltage supply present

lights

AS-i communication error, e.g. slave address = 0

flashes

periphery fault **)

**) Indication periphery fault in the following cases:

- At least one of the analogue signals is outside of the value range.
- There is nothing connected to at least one analogue channel.

102

ifm AS-Interface manual tips and tricks for users edition 2.1
Device descriptions

4.9

2012-09-26
Device description field modules ClassicLine (screw mounting, AC25nn)

Device description field modules ClassicLine

(screw mounting, AC25nn)
Operating conditions, installation .............................................................................................. 103
Electrical connection ................................................................................................................. 104
Addressing ................................................................................................................................ 104
Connecting analogue periphery (AC25nn)................................................................................ 106
LED behaviour (AC25nn) .......................................................................................................... 114
6345

Examples:

AC2509

4.9.1

AC2515

Operating conditions, installation

6347

Protection IP 67

When installing the module on a wired FC lower part:

Tighten the screws crosswise with a tightening torque of 0.8 Nm.
To ensure the protection rating:
- Cover the unused M12 sockets using the protective caps E73004!
- Permissible tightening torque of the protective caps = 0.6...0.8 Nm.
Permissible tightening torque of the M12 connectors = 0.60.8 Nm.
Use the enclosed seals for sealing the lower part if the AS-i flat cable ends in the FC lower part.
If modules with stainless steel screws are used, the corresponding FC lower parts with stainless
steel threaded inserts must be used (e.g. AC5014, AC5015).

103

ifm AS-Interface manual tips and tricks for users edition 2.1
Device descriptions

4.9.2

2012-09-26
Device description field modules ClassicLine (screw mounting, AC25nn)

Electrical connection
6381

Disconnect the installation from power before connecting the modules to the periphery.
Connect the module to AS-Interface either:
- via the flat cable lower part AC5000 or AC5010 (for supply from AS-i) OR:
- via the flat cable lower part AC5003 or AC5011 (for supply from an ext. 24 V PELV voltage
source).
Digital modules: Do NOT connect the inputs to an external potential, when the inputs are supplied
from the AS-i voltage.
Analogue modules: If a total of over 100 mA is needed for the sensor supply, the supply must be
from an external 24 V PELV voltage source. The supply is automatically changed when the
external 24 V voltage is applied.

4.9.3

Addressing
6349

Address the module...

either with the addressing unit prior to installation,

or in conjunction with the FC lower part with integrated addressing socket when mounted and
wired.

with the IR addressing adapter E70211 ( Infrared addressing ( page 105)).

If a slave is used with the ID code "A" (extended address mode enabled) combined with a master of
the 1st generation (version 2.0) then:

104

Set parameter P3=1.

Set output bit D3=0.
The output bit D3 must not be used.

Assign an address of 1A...31A to this slave.

ifm AS-Interface manual tips and tricks for users edition 2.1
Device descriptions

2012-09-26
Device description field modules ClassicLine (screw mounting, AC25nn)

Infrared addressing
6350

The AS-i module also offers the option of infrared addressing with the addressing unit AC1154 and the
addressing cable E70211.
Addressing the module
Switch off the AS-i power supply
Disconnect the AS-i master or use the jumper on the ifm AS-i power supply to interrupt
communication
Switch on the AS-i power supply
Connect the infrared addressing cable to the module
Select an address and remove the addressing cable
Switch off the AS-i power supply
Connect the AS-i master again or use the jumper on the ifm AS-i power supply to start
communication again
Switch on the AS-i power supply
When the AS-i power supply is switched on and off, the module is reset.

105

ifm AS-Interface manual tips and tricks for users edition 2.1
Device descriptions

4.9.4

2012-09-26
Device description field modules ClassicLine (screw mounting, AC25nn)

Connecting analogue periphery (AC25nn)

Analogue inputs 4...20 mA (AC2516, AC2566) ........................................................................ 107

Analogue inputs 0...10 V (AC2517)........................................................................................... 108
Analogue inputs 4...20 mA (AC2526)........................................................................................ 108
Parameter setting (AC2516, AC2517, AC2526, AC2566) ........................................................ 109
Measuring range (AC2516, AC2526, AC2566)......................................................................... 109
Measuring range (AC2517)....................................................................................................... 109
Analogue temperature measurement Pt100 (AC2520, AC2570) ............................................. 110
Parameter setting (AC2520, AC2570) ...................................................................................... 111
Measuring range (AC2520, AC2570)........................................................................................ 111
Analogue outputs 0...20 mA (AC2518, AC2521, AC2568) ....................................................... 112
Analogue outputs 0...10 V (AC2519) ........................................................................................ 113
Parameter setting (AC2518, AC2519, AC2521, AC2568) ........................................................ 113
Measuring range (AC2518, AC2521, AC2568)......................................................................... 113
Measuring range (AC2519)....................................................................................................... 113
6491

Do not lay the sensor cables in loops, to avoid interference.

Avoid direct tractive forces on the cables.
For modules with Pt100 inputs:
Connect at least one Pt100 sensor prior to switching on the AS-i slave, to start the A/D converter.
Otherwise there will be an error message: LEDs I1...I4 flashing at 5 Hz.
Only for analogue input modules (AC2516, AC2517, AC2566):

NOTICE
This could destroy the unit!
When a combined sensor is connected (pin 2: analogue output, pin 4: 24 V output) ensure that the
switching output cannot switch.
To do so, set the combined sensor accordingly (e.g. by selection of a switch point which cannot be
reached or by the configuration "NPN switching").

106

ifm AS-Interface manual tips and tricks for users edition 2.1
Device descriptions

2012-09-26
Device description field modules ClassicLine (screw mounting, AC25nn)

Analogue inputs 4...20 mA (AC2516, AC2566)

6510

When an external link between pin 3 and pin 4 is used, the internal link can be deactivated by
resetting the parameter bit P0.
The internal link (pin 3 and pin 4) must be activated via the parameter bit P0.
Wiring 2-wire sensor without own supply
Pin 1 = sensor supply +24 V
Pin 2 = analogue input AI+ current
Pin 3 = sensor supply 0 V
Pin 4 = analogue input AIPin 5 = functional earth

Wiring 2-wire sensor with own supply

Pin 1 = sensor supply +24 V
Pin 2 = analogue input AI+ current
Pin 3 = sensor supply 0 V
Pin 4 = analogue input AIPin 5 = functional earth

Wiring 3-wire sensor without own supply

Pin 1 = sensor supply +24 V
Pin 2 = analogue input AI+ current
Pin 3 = sensor supply 0 V
Pin 4 = analogue input AIPin 5 = functional earth

Wiring 4-wire sensor without own supply

Pin 1 = sensor supply +24 V
Pin 2 = analogue input AI+ current
Pin 3 = sensor supply 0 V
Pin 4 = analogue input AIPin 5 = functional earth

In case of connection of a 4-wire sensor the internal link between pin 3 and pin 4 must be
deactivated. To do so, reset parameter bit P0.

107

ifm AS-Interface manual tips and tricks for users edition 2.1
Device descriptions

2012-09-26
Device description field modules ClassicLine (screw mounting, AC25nn)

Analogue inputs 0...10 V (AC2517)

6525

The parameter bit P0 is of no importance for the AC2517!

Wiring 3-wire sensor without own supply
Pin 1 = sensor supply +24 V
Pin 2 = analogue input AI+ voltage
Pin 3 = sensor supply 0 V
Pin 4 = analogue input AIPin 5 = functional earth

In case of connection of a 3-wire sensor without own supply, the link must be made externally
between pin 3 and pin 4!

Analogue inputs 4...20 mA (AC2526)

6681

Wiring 2-wire sensor without own supply

Pin 1 = sensor supply +24 V
Pin 2 = analogue input AI+
Pin 3 = sensor supply 0 V / analogue input AIPin 4 = n.c.
Pin 5 = functional earth

Wiring 2-wire sensor with own supply

Pin 1 = sensor supply +24 V
Pin 2 = analogue input AI+ current
Pin 3 = sensor supply 0 V
Pin 4 = n.c.
Pin 5 = functional earth

Wiring 3-wire sensor without own supply

Pin 1 = sensor supply +24 V
Pin 2 = analogue input AI+
Pin 3 = sensor supply 0 V / analogue input AIPin 4 = n.c.
Pin 5 = functional earth

108

ifm AS-Interface manual tips and tricks for users edition 2.1

2012-09-26

Device descriptions

Device description field modules ClassicLine (screw mounting, AC25nn)

Parameter setting (AC2516, AC2517, AC2526, AC2566)

6528

Parameter bit Designation

Description

P0 *)

0 = 4-wire operation (link is inactive)

(for AC2516, AC2566)

selection 2/3 wires / 4 wires

1 = 2-/3-wire operation (link is active)

P1,
P2

channel activation

P3

indication of periphery faults

P1

P2

channel
1

channel
2

channel
3

channel
4

on

off

off

off

on

on

off

off

on

on

on

off

on

on

on

on

0 = periphery fault indication is not active

1 = periphery fault indication is active

*) not used for AC2517

Changing slave parameter data ( page 41)

Measuring range (AC2516, AC2526, AC2566)

11299

Analogue input module, nominal range = 4...20 mA

Range
[mA]

Units
[dec]

Units
[hex]

LED yellow
AI1AI4

Meaning

<1

32767

7FFF

flashes

wire break

13.999

10003999

03E80F9F

lights

below nominal range

420

400020000

0FA04E20

lights

nominal range

20.00123

2000123000

4E2159D8

lights

overcontrol

> 23

32767

7FFF

flashes

overflow

Measuring range (AC2517)

11300

Analogue input module, nominal range = 0...10 V

Range
[V]

Units
[dec]

Units
[hex]

LED yellow
AI1AI4

Meaning

010

010000

00002710

lights

nominal range

10.00111.5

1000111500

2711...2CEC

lights

overcontrol

> 11.5

32767

7FFF

flashes

overflow

109

ifm AS-Interface manual tips and tricks for users edition 2.1
Device descriptions

2012-09-26
Device description field modules ClassicLine (screw mounting, AC25nn)

Analogue temperature measurement Pt100 (AC2520, AC2570)

6546

Wiring 2-wire Pt100 sensor

Pin 1 = S+
Pin 2 = AI+
Pin 3 = SPin 4 = AIPin 5 = functional earth (screen)

Wiring 4-wire Pt100 sensor

Pin 1 = S+
Pin 2 = AI+
Pin 3 = SPin 4 = AIPin 5 = functional earth (screen)

For modules with Pt100 inputs:

Connect at least one Pt100 sensor prior to switching on the AS-i slave, to start the A/D converter.
Otherwise there will be an error message: LEDs I1...I4 flashing at 5 Hz.
Important notes on Pt100 measurements

With the Pt100 measuring method, very low currents flow into the measuring electronics.

4-wire Pt100 sensors provide more precise results than 2-wire sensors. For 2-wire measurement,
all contact resistances and connection resistances add up by measurement and can massively
falsify the measurement result.

The changeover between 2- wire and 4-wire sensors is made via the parameter bit P3.
Avoid additional resistance (conductors, contact and transfer resistance, loose contacts, etc.) in
the measuring circuit! This ensures a precise measurement.
Use high-quality connectors for the AS-i Pt100 module. Prefer prewired and potted connectors
with gold-plated contacts.

110

ifm AS-Interface manual tips and tricks for users edition 2.1

2012-09-26

Device descriptions

Device description field modules ClassicLine (screw mounting, AC25nn)

Parameter setting (AC2520, AC2570)

6551

Parameter bit Designation

Description

P0

0 = 60 Hz filter is active

filter for A/D converter

1 = 50 Hz filter is active (for the whole of Europe)

P1,
P2

periphery fault is detected by

channel...

P3

Pt100 sensor type

P1

P2

channel
1

channel
2

channel
3

channel
4

yes

no

no

no

yes

yes

no

no

yes

yes

yes

no

yes

yes

yes

yes

0 = 4-wire mode
1 = 2-wire mode

The parameter bits P1 and P2 define which measuring channels can trigger a periphery fault
message. But irrespective of the defined parameters all 4 channels are always transferred via the ASInterface.
Changing slave parameter data ( page 41)

Measuring range (AC2520, AC2570)

11301

Pt100 module, nominal range = -200...+850 C

Range
[C]

Units
[dec]

Units
[hex]

LED yellow
AI1AI4

Meaning

< -219.4

32767

7FFF

flashes

short circuit

-219.4-200.1

-2194-2001

F76EF82F

lights

below nominal range

-200+850

-20008500

F8302134

lights

nominal range

+850.1+883.6

85018836

21352090

lights

overcontrol

> +883.6

32767

7FFF

out

wire break

111

ifm AS-Interface manual tips and tricks for users edition 2.1
Device descriptions

2012-09-26
Device description field modules ClassicLine (screw mounting, AC25nn)

Analogue outputs 0...20 mA (AC2518, AC2521, AC2568)

6529

Do NOT connect the analogue outputs AO- to each other, neither directly nor indirectly (via the
connected actuator)!
For AC2518, AC2568:
Wiring 2-wire actuator
Pin 1 = analogue output AO+
Pin 2 = n.c.
Pin 3 = analogue output 0 V AOPin 4 = n.c.
Pin 5 = functional earth

Additional note for the current output AC2nn8:

Do not connect the terminal [analogue output 0V] of the respective channels of the current output
module to each other!
The connection can e.g. also be made when connecting a multi-channel frequency inverter.
>

This connection leads to faulty current signals. Reason: A parallel connection of the internal
resistances is established by connecting the terminal [analogue output 0V]:

Solution: Use of two current output modules.

When using voltage output modules the 0V terminals can be connected.
For AC2521:
Wiring 3-wire actuator
Pin 1 = analogue output AO+
Pin 2 = actuator supply +24 V
Pin 3 = analogue output 0 V AOPin 4 = n.c.
Pin 5 = functional earth

112

ifm AS-Interface manual tips and tricks for users edition 2.1

2012-09-26

Device descriptions

Device description field modules ClassicLine (screw mounting, AC25nn)

Analogue outputs 0...10 V (AC2519)

6542

Wiring 2-wire actuator

Pin 1 = analogue output AO+
Pin 2 = n.c.
Pin 3 = analogue output 0 V AOPin 4 = n.c.
Pin 5 = functional earth

Parameter setting (AC2518, AC2519, AC2521, AC2568)

6545

Parameter
bit

Designation

Description

P0 *)

monitoring profile 7.3

(watchdog)

0 = not monitored

P1

not used

reserved

P2

periphery fault

0 = fault indication is not active

1 = monitored

1 = fault indication is active

P3

not used

reserved

*) not used for AC2521

Changing slave parameter data ( page 41)

Measuring range (AC2518, AC2521, AC2568)

11302

Analogue output module, nominal range = 0...20 mA

Range
[mA]

Units
[dec]

Units
[hex]

LED yellow
AO1AO4

Meaning

020

020000

00004E20

lights

nominal range

20.00123

2000123000

4E2159D8

lights

overcontrol

> 23

> 23000

> 59D8

flashes

overflow

Measuring range (AC2519)

11303

Analogue output module, nominal range = 0...10 V

Range
[V]

Units
[dec]

Units
[hex]

LED yellow
AO1AO4

Meaning

010

010000

00002710

lights

nominal range

10.00111.5

1000111500

2711...2CEC

lights

overcontrol

> 11.5

> 11500

> 2CEC

flashes

overflow

113

ifm AS-Interface manual tips and tricks for users edition 2.1

2012-09-26

Device descriptions

Device description field modules ClassicLine (screw mounting, AC25nn)

4.9.5

LED behaviour (AC25nn)

6427

LED behaviour of the digital modules

6808

Diagnostic LED

Description

[AS-i]

green

lights

AS-i voltage supply present

[AUX]

green

lights

external voltage supply present 24 V DC

[I1]...[I4]
[O1]...[O4]

yellow

lights

binary input/output is switched on

[FAULT]

red

lights

AS-i communication error, e.g. slave address = 0

flashes

periphery fault **)

**) Indication periphery fault in the following cases:

- Lacking auxiliary voltage.
- Overload etc.

LED behaviour (AC2516, AC2526, AC2566)

6806

Diagnostic LED

Description

[PWR]

green

lights

AS-i voltage supply present

[AUX]

green

lights

external voltage supply present 24 V DC

lights

analogue signal in the measuring range

[AI-1]...[AI-4]

yellow

flashes

analogue signal outside the measuring range (overflow), no sensor

connected or wire break

[AI-2]...[AI-4]

yellow

off

no sensor connected (at least one LED flashes, because not all channels
can be deactivated via the parameter bit P1/P2 (channel activation)
(channel 1 is always activated))

[FAULT]

red

lights

AS-i communication error, e.g. slave address = 0

flashes

periphery fault **)

**) Indication periphery fault in the following cases:

- At least one of the analogue signals is outside of the value range.
- Nothing connected to at least one analogue channel, although the respective channel is activated.
- There is a wire break.

114

ifm AS-Interface manual tips and tricks for users edition 2.1

2012-09-26

Device descriptions

Device description field modules ClassicLine (screw mounting, AC25nn)

LED behaviour (AC2517)

6810

Diagnostic LED

Description

[PWR]

green

lights

AS-i voltage supply present

[AUX]

green

lights

external voltage supply present 24 V DC

lights

the respective channel is activated

analogue signal in the measuring range or no sensor connected (it cannot
be differentiated whether the 0 V signal is applied or whether no sensor is
connected)

flashes

analogue signal outside the measuring range (outside range)

off

the respective channel is not activated

(channel 1 is always activated)

lights

AS-i communication error, e.g. slave address = 0

flashes

periphery fault **)

[AI-1]...[AI-4]

yellow

[AI-2]...[AI-4]

yellow

[FAULT]

red

**) Indication periphery fault in the following cases:

- At least one of the analogue signals is outside of the value range.

LED behaviour (AC2520)

6811

Diagnostic LED

Description

[PWR]

green

[AI-1]...[AI-4]

yellow

[FAULT]

red

lights

AS-i voltage supply present

lights

analogue signal in the measuring range

flashes

analogue signal outside the measuring range (overflow), no sensor

connected or wire break

lights

AS-i communication error, e.g. slave address = 0

flashes

periphery fault **)

**) Indication periphery fault in the following cases:

- At least one of the analogue signals is outside of the value range.
- Nothing connected to at least one analogue channel, although the respective channel is activated.

LED behaviour (AC2518, AC2519, AC2521, AC2568)

6813

Diagnostic LED

Description

[PWR]

green

lights

AS-i voltage supply present

[AUX]

green

lights

external voltage supply present 24 V DC

lights

analogue signal within the measuring range or no actuator connected. It

cannot be differentiated whether the 0V/0mA signal is applied or whether
no actuator is connected.

flashes

analogue signal outside the measuring range (outside range)

lights

AS-i communication error, e.g. slave address = 0

flashes

periphery fault **)

[AO-1]...[AO-4]

[FAULT]

yellow

red

**) Indication periphery fault in the following cases:

- At least one of the analogue signals is outside of the value range.

115

ifm AS-Interface manual tips and tricks for users edition 2.1
Device descriptions

4.10

2012-09-26
Device description field modules ClassicLine (quick mounting, AC52nn)

Device description field modules ClassicLine

(quick mounting, AC52nn)

Operating conditions, installation .............................................................................................. 116

Installing quick mounting modules ............................................................................................ 117
Electrical connection ................................................................................................................. 123
Addressing ................................................................................................................................ 123
Connecting analogue periphery (AC52xx) ................................................................................ 124
LED behaviour (AC52nn) .......................................................................................................... 130
6353

Examples:

AC5215

4.10.1

AC5235

Operating conditions, installation

6354

Protection IP 67

To ensure the protection rating:

- Cover the unused M12 sockets using the protective caps E73004!
- Permissible tightening torque of the protective caps = 0.6...0.8 Nm.
Permissible tightening torque of the M12 connectors = 0.60.8 Nm.
The flat cable must not end in the device and must be sealed outside of the device with the flat
cable seal E70413 (IP 67) or the heat-shrink cap E70113 ( Sealing the AS-i flat cable end
( page 23)).
The flat cable cannot be branched in the lower part.
Branching must be implemented using corresponding accessories (e.g. E70381).
Avoid build-up of dirt and dust on the upper and lower parts so that the locking mechanism is not
affected.

116

ifm AS-Interface manual tips and tricks for users edition 2.1
Device descriptions

4.10.2

2012-09-26
Device description field modules ClassicLine (quick mounting, AC52nn)

Installing quick mounting modules

Installation variants.................................................................................................................... 118

Adjusting the cable guide on the lower part .............................................................................. 119
Adjusting the cable guide on the upper part ............................................................................. 120
Installing the device................................................................................................................... 121
Opening / uninstalling the device .............................................................................................. 122
6616

Example for quick mounting module: AC5211

In this documentation, installation is shown at
the example of a slim device (45 mm) with
external supply of the outputs (with black AS-i
cable).

117

ifm AS-Interface manual tips and tricks for users edition 2.1
Device descriptions

2012-09-26
Device description field modules ClassicLine (quick mounting, AC52nn)

Installation variants
6634

With the supplied lower part the flat cable can be aligned in three directions.
Pos. 1

>

Orientation horizontally from left to right

(= factory setting).

If this preset orientation is correct for the

application, continue with Installing the
device ( page 121)

Pos. 2

>

Orientation vertically from bottom to top.

Pos. 3

>

Orientation horizontally from right to left.

118

ifm AS-Interface manual tips and tricks for users edition 2.1
Device descriptions

2012-09-26
Device description field modules ClassicLine (quick mounting, AC52nn)

Adjusting the cable guide on the lower part

6635

1.

Remove the flat cable guide (1) from the

lower part.
Turn the flat cable guide (1) according to
the requested cable direction.

2.

Insert the flat cable guide into the lower

part according to the requested cable
direction.
>

The visible position number (here: 2)

indicates the selected cable direction.

119

ifm AS-Interface manual tips and tricks for users edition 2.1
Device descriptions

2012-09-26
Device description field modules ClassicLine (quick mounting, AC52nn)

Adjusting the cable guide on the upper part

6636

a)

Handling variant a

b)

Handling variant b

120

Turn the flat cable contact using a

screwdriver so that the triangle ( arrow)
points towards the requested cable guide
position.

Turn the flat cable contact with the

yellow-black flat cable guide (from the
lower part) so that the visible position
number (here: 1) corresponds to the
requested cable guide position.

ifm AS-Interface manual tips and tricks for users edition 2.1
Device descriptions

2012-09-26
Device description field modules ClassicLine (quick mounting, AC52nn)

Installing the device

6637

1.

Alignment of the flat cable on delivery.

2.

Place the upper part.

3.

Lock the device.

4.

Carefully place the yellow and optionally

the black AS-i flat cable into the profile
slot.

Take care in laying the AS-i flat

cable. The flat cable should be laid
straight for about 15 cm.

121

ifm AS-Interface manual tips and tricks for users edition 2.1
Device descriptions

2012-09-26
Device description field modules ClassicLine (quick mounting, AC52nn)

Opening / uninstalling the device

6638

1.

Unlock the device using a screwdriver.

2.

Open the locking until the end stop.

3.

Remove the upper part.

122

ifm AS-Interface manual tips and tricks for users edition 2.1
Device descriptions

4.10.3

2012-09-26
Device description field modules ClassicLine (quick mounting, AC52nn)

Electrical connection
6356

Do NOT connect the inputs (M12 sockets) to an external potential when these are supplied from
the AS-i voltage.
Do not lay the sensor cables in loops, to avoid interference.
Avoid direct tractive forces on the cables.

4.10.4

Addressing
6357

When mounted and wired, the module can be addressed with the addressing cable E70213 via the
integrated addressing interface.

ATTENTION
A connector other than the ifm jack plug E70213 can destroy the addressing socket!
Non ifm connectors (other than ifm article E70213) can cause short-circuits or irreparable
deformations of the socket contacts, resulting in a damaged addressing socket. As a consequence the
device can no longer communicate since it is permanently separated from the AS-i bus.
For addressing only use the ifm jack plug E70213!
If a slave is used with the ID code "A" (extended address mode enabled) combined with a master of
the 1st generation (version 2.0) then:

Set parameter P3=1.

Set output bit D3=0.
The output bit D3 must not be used.

Assign an address of 1A...31A to this slave.

123

ifm AS-Interface manual tips and tricks for users edition 2.1
Device descriptions

4.10.5

2012-09-26
Device description field modules ClassicLine (quick mounting, AC52nn)

Connecting analogue periphery (AC52nn)

Analogue inputs 4...20 mA (AC5222)........................................................................................ 125

Analogue inputs 4...20 mA (AC5223)........................................................................................ 126
Parameter setting (AC5222, AC5223) ...................................................................................... 127
Differences AC5222 / AC5223 ................................................................................................. 128
6493

Draw max. 200 mA in total when the sensors are supplied from AS-i.
Do not lay the sensor cables in loops, to avoid interference.
Avoid direct tractive forces on the cables.
The earthing lead (2.8 x 0.5 mm) on the supplied lower part is connected to pin 5 (functional earth) of
the M12 sockets.

124

ifm AS-Interface manual tips and tricks for users edition 2.1
Device descriptions

2012-09-26
Device description field modules ClassicLine (quick mounting, AC52nn)

Analogue inputs 4...20 mA (AC5222)

6652

NOTE
Sensor supply connections (pins 1, 3) and AS-i are electrically connected.
The module has NO connection option for an external supply from the black AUX flat cable.
The analogue input is between pin 2 and pin 3; it is thus always electrically connected to AS-i.
2-wire and 3-wire sensors for which the provided current supply of the module from AS-i is not
sufficient and which have NO electrical connection to other potentials can be connected without any
problems.
If the sensor is to obtain its operating current from an external source, this source must have NO
electrical connection to any other electrical network, because otherwise the AS-i connection of the
module will have a forbidden electrical connection.
Wiring 2-wire sensor without own supply
Pin 1 = sensor supply +24 V
Pin 2 = analogue input AI+
Pin 3 = sensor supply 0 V / analogue input AIPin 4 = n.c.
Pin 5 = functional earth

Wiring 2-wire sensor with electrically isolated and earth-free supply

Pin 1 = sensor supply +24 V
Pin 2 = analogue input AI+
Pin 3 = sensor supply 0 V / analogue input AIPin 4 = n.c.
Pin 5 = functional earth

Wiring 3-wire sensor without own supply

Pin 1 = sensor supply +24 V
Pin 2 = analogue input AI+
Pin 3 = sensor supply 0 V / analogue input AIPin 4 = n.c.
Pin 5 = functional earth

125

ifm AS-Interface manual tips and tricks for users edition 2.1
Device descriptions

2012-09-26
Device description field modules ClassicLine (quick mounting, AC52nn)

Analogue inputs 4...20 mA (AC5223)

6560

For 2-wire or 3-wire sensors without own supply:

Establish an external link between pin 3 and pin 4!

NOTE
Sensor supply connections (pins 1, 3) and AS-i are electrically connected.
The module has NO connection option for an external supply from the black AUX flat cable.
The analogue input is between pin 2 and pin 4; it is thus electrically separated from AS-i in principle.
If only the analogue input (pins 2, 4) is used without sensor supply (pins 1, 3), the supply and electrical
connection of the sensor can be made with the corresponding extra-low voltage as required. The
required electrical separation from AS-i is maintained.
Wiring 2-wire sensor with own, grounded supply
Pin 1 = sensor supply +24 V
Pin 2 = analogue input AI+
Pin 3 = sensor supply 0 V
Pin 4 = analogue input AIPin 5 = functional earth

Wiring 2-wire sensor without own supply

Pin 1 = sensor supply +24 V
Pin 2 = analogue input AI+
Pin 3 = sensor supply 0 V
Pin 4 = analogue input AIPin 5 = functional earth

Establish an external link between pin 3 and pin 4!

Wiring 3-wire sensor without own supply

Pin 1 = sensor supply +24 V
Pin 2 = analogue input AI+
Pin 3 = sensor supply 0 V
Pin 4 = analogue input AIPin 5 = functional earth

Establish an external link between pin 3 and pin 4!

Wiring 4-wire sensor without own supply

Pin 1 = sensor supply +24 V
Pin 2 = analogue input AI+
Pin 3 = sensor supply 0 V
Pin 4 = analogue input AIPin 5 = functional earth

126

ifm AS-Interface manual tips and tricks for users edition 2.1
Device descriptions

2012-09-26
Device description field modules ClassicLine (quick mounting, AC52nn)

Parameter setting (AC5222, AC5223)

6567

Parameter bit Designation

Description

P0

0 = 60 Hz filter is active

filter for A/D converter

1 = 50 Hz filter is active (for the whole of Europe)

P1

activate channel 2 *)

0 = channel 2 not activated

1 = channel 2 activated

P2

indication of periphery faults

0 = periphery fault indication is not active

1 = periphery fault indication is active

P3

not used

reserved

*) Configuration has an effect on the conversion time in the AS-i slave, the transmission via the ASInterface, the LED function and the periphery fault messages.
By disabling channel 2 the conversion time in the slave can be reduced considerably. LED indication
and periphery fault messages are then no longer influenced by this channel.
Changing slave parameter data ( page 41)

127

ifm AS-Interface manual tips and tricks for users edition 2.1
Device descriptions

2012-09-26
Device description field modules ClassicLine (quick mounting, AC52nn)

Differences AC5222 / AC5223

11304

Parameter

AC5222

AC5223

Sensor supply

from AS-i, max. 200 mA

from AS-i, max. 200 mA

Connection of

2- and 3-wire sensors

2- and 3- and 4-wire sensors

Particularities

electrical connection between the sensor connection and AS-i

electrical separation between the sensor connection and AS-i if

the sensor is NOT supplied via the module (AS-i)

wiring 2-wire sensor without own supply

wiring 2-wire sensor without own supply

2-wire sensor (supply

via the module)

Pin 1 = sensor supply +24 V

Pin 2 = analogue input AI+
Pin 3 = sensor supply 0 V / analogue input AIPin 4 = n.c.
Pin 5 = functional earth

Pin 1 = sensor supply +24 V

Pin 2 = analogue input AI+
Pin 3 = sensor supply 0 V
Pin 4 = analogue input AIPin 5 = functional earth

Establish an external link between pin 3 and

pin 4!
wiring 2-wire sensor
with own, earthed supply

wiring 2-wire sensor

with electrically separated and earth-free supply

2-wire sensor
Pin 1 = sensor supply +24 V
Pin 2 = analogue input AI+
Pin 3 = sensor supply 0 V / analogue input AIPin 4 = n.c.
Pin 5 = functional earth

Pin 1 = sensor supply +24 V

Pin 2 = analogue input AI+
Pin 3 = sensor supply 0 V
Pin 4 = analogue input AIPin 5 = functional earth

The sensor is not supplied via the module but via an own earth- The sensor is not supplied via the module but via an own
earthed supply.
free supply.
wiring 3-wire sensor without own supply

wiring 3-wire sensor without own supply

3-wire sensor (supply

via the module)
Pin 1 = sensor supply +24 V
Pin 2 = analogue input AI+
Pin 3 = sensor supply 0 V / analogue input AIPin 4 = n.c.
Pin 5 = functional earth

Pin 1 = sensor supply +24 V

Pin 2 = analogue input AI+
Pin 3 = sensor supply 0 V
Pin 4 = analogue input AIPin 5 = functional earth

128

Establish an external link between pin 3 and

pin 4!

ifm AS-Interface manual tips and tricks for users edition 2.1
Device descriptions
Parameter

2012-09-26
Device description field modules ClassicLine (quick mounting, AC52nn)

AC5222

AC5223
wiring 4-wire sensor without own supply

4-wire sensor

--Pin 1 = sensor supply +24 V

Pin 2 = analogue input AI+
Pin 3 = sensor supply 0 V
Pin 4 = analogue input AIPin 5 = functional earth

AS-i profile

S-7.3.D

S-7.3.D

Accessories
(supplied)

lower part

lower part

analogue connector E75222

M12 protective cap E73004

analogue connector E75222

M12 protective cap E73004

Accessories (optional)

129

ifm AS-Interface manual tips and tricks for users edition 2.1

2012-09-26

Device descriptions

Device description field modules ClassicLine (quick mounting, AC52nn)

4.10.6

LED behaviour (AC52nn)

6840

LED behaviour of the digital modules

6808

Diagnostic LED

Description

[AS-i]

green

lights

AS-i voltage supply present

[AUX]

green

lights

external voltage supply present 24 V DC

[I1]...[I4]
[O1]...[O4]

yellow

lights

binary input/output is switched on

[FAULT]

red

lights

AS-i communication error, e.g. slave address = 0

flashes

periphery fault **)

**) Indication periphery fault in the following cases:

- Lacking auxiliary voltage.
- Overload etc.

LED behaviour (AC5222, AC5223)

6817

Diagnostic LED
[PWR]

[AI-1]...[AI-2]

[FAULT]

Description
green

yellow

red

lights

AS-i voltage supply present

lights

analogue signal in the measuring range

flashes

analogue signal outside the measuring range

or: no sensor connected

off

sensor input is deactivated ( parameter bit P1)

lights

AS-i communication error, e.g. slave address = 0

flashes

periphery fault **)

**) Indication periphery fault in the following cases:

- At least one of the analogue signals is outside of the value range.
- Nothing connected to at least one analogue channel, although the respective channel is activated.
- In case of overload or short circuit of the sensor supply.

LED display of the logic PLC outputs

6845

For the ClassicLine modules (quick mounting), additional LEDs below the [FAULT] indication signal
the logic state of the PLC outputs.
The LEDs [O1]...[O4] represent the data bits D0...D3.

130

ifm AS-Interface manual tips and tricks for users edition 2.1
Device descriptions

4.11

2012-09-26
Device description field modules AirBox (screw mounting, AC20nn)

Device description field modules AirBox (screw

mounting, AC20nn)

Operating conditions, installation .............................................................................................. 131

Electrical connection ................................................................................................................. 132
Addressing ................................................................................................................................ 132
Pneumatics................................................................................................................................ 133
LED behaviour AirBox (AC20nn) .............................................................................................. 136
6359

Examples:

AC2046

AC2055

4.11.1

Operating conditions, installation

6361

Protection rating of the devices depending on the version IP 65 (filter version) and IP 67 with
common exhaust (tube connection to lead the exhaust air of the AirBox away e.g. from the wet
area).
In dusty environments the AirBox can be installed with the filter facing downwards.
When installing the module on a wired FC lower part:
Tighten the screws crosswise with a tightening torque of 0.8 Nm.
Use the enclosed seals for sealing the lower part if the AS-i flat cable ends in the FC lower part.
To guarantee the protection rating: if the AS-i flat cable ends outside of the device, use the flat
cable seal E70413 (IP 67) or the heat-shrink cap E70113 ( Sealing the AS-i flat cable end
( page 23)).
To ensure the protection rating:
- Cover the unused M12 sockets using the protective caps E73004!
- Permissible tightening torque of the protective caps = 0.6...0.8 Nm.
Permissible tightening torque of the M12 connectors = 0.60.8 Nm.

131

ifm AS-Interface manual tips and tricks for users edition 2.1
Device descriptions

4.11.2

2012-09-26
Device description field modules AirBox (screw mounting, AC20nn)

Electrical connection
6430

Do NOT connect the inputs to an external potential, because the inputs are supplied from the AS-i
voltage.
Do not lay the sensor cables in loops, to avoid interference.
Avoid direct tractive forces on the cables.

4.11.3

Addressing
6383

Address the module...

either with the addressing unit prior to installation,

or in conjunction with the FC lower part (e.g. AC5011) with integrated addressing socket when
mounted and wired.

For the FC lower part AC5011 the following applies:

When mounted and wired, the module can be addressed with the addressing cable E70213 via the
integrated addressing interface.

ATTENTION
A connector other than the ifm jack plug E70213 can destroy the addressing socket!
Non ifm connectors (other than ifm article E70213) can cause short-circuits or irreparable
deformations of the socket contacts, resulting in a damaged addressing socket. As a consequence the
device can no longer communicate since it is permanently separated from the AS-i bus.
For addressing only use the ifm jack plug E70213!

132

ifm AS-Interface manual tips and tricks for users edition 2.1
Device descriptions

4.11.4

2012-09-26
Device description field modules AirBox (screw mounting, AC20nn)

Pneumatics
6373

AirBox

Operating pressure

Flow (at 6/5 bar)

2x3/2-way AirBox

28 bar

350 Nl/min

4/2-way AirBox

38 bar

500 Nl/min

A combination of slide and seat valve is used in the AirBox, which is NOT free from overlapping.
Connect the AirBox to the actuator in the shortest possible way, to avoid pressure losses and to
achieve faster switching times.
Connect the AirBox with the pneumatic system via tube fittings, outside calibration according to
CETOP standard RP 54 P.
To remove the tubes press on the clamping ring and pull out the tube at the same time.
The pneumatic output can be activated manually using the manual override: by pressing/releasing
or pressing/turning/locking depending on the version.
The electrical control has priority over the mechanical control (manual override).
The reduction of the tube diameter (e.g. from 8 mm to 6 mm) reduces among others the flow rate

NOTICE
Risk of permanent leaks or irreparable damage to the pneumatic components! Risk of malfunctions!
Operate the device only within the indicated operating pressure range ( table above).
Prepare the compressed air properly.
Operating pressure: maximum 8 bar, minimum (depending on the device) 2 bar or 3 bar. The minimum
pressure is required for a complete switching of the main valve. If this minimum pressure is not
applied, leakage occurs via the exhaust connection [3] of the AirBox. This is the characteristic
behaviour of a valve which is not free from overlapping.

NOTE
Provide all pneumatic connections of the AirBox either with suitable cover plugs or tube them
immediately upon installation. This prevents the ingress of moisture and dirt into the AirBox.
Once the AirBox has been operated with lubricated compressed air, it must continue to be
operated with lubricated air because the oil has removed the initial lubrication.

133

ifm AS-Interface manual tips and tricks for users edition 2.1
Device descriptions

2012-09-26
Device description field modules AirBox (screw mounting, AC20nn)

Auxiliary air
6374

The 4/2-way AirBox has an external auxiliary air connection (4 mm). External auxiliary air is required:

when pressures < 3 bar are to be switched,

when vacuum is to be switched,

in case of parallel connection of valves, if a considerable pressure drop is to be expected (at a

high simultaneity factor).

Apply the auxiliary air [81] with at least 3 bar to enable switching of the valve.
The connection of the auxiliary air is integrated in the module and is activated by inserting the 4 mm
compressed air tube. If no tube is connected, this pneumatic input is closed (IP 67).

Switching of vacuum with 4/2-way valve

6375

The AirBox is supplied with vacuum via the 8 mm connection.

Additionally supply the AirBox with compressed air (min. 3 bar) via the 4 mm connection [81].
Explanation:
The auxiliary air connection is required because the forces in the AirBox are "reversed" in case of
vacuum operation and the switching of the valve (slide) must continue to be ensured.
Connect the operating connection [4] of the AirBox e.g. to the suction unit, provide the operating
connection [2] with a blind plug.

Purity of compressed air (specification)

6376

According to ISO 8573-1:2001 the air purity is divided into three classes:
1. The purity class of the solid particle content
2. The purity class for the humidity content
3. The purity class for the total oil content
The AirBoxes are suitable for compressed air of the purity classes: 6- 3- 4
Meaning:
1. Solid particle content acc. to class 6: Max. particle size 5 m, max. particle density 5 mg/m3
2. Maximum water content acc. to class 3: Pressure dew point ( page 146, page 135) -20 C
3. Maximum total oil content acc. to class 4: < 5 mg/m3, this corresponds to approx. 1 oil drop per
4 000 litres of air.

134

ifm AS-Interface manual tips and tricks for users edition 2.1
Device descriptions

2012-09-26
Device description field modules AirBox (screw mounting, AC20nn)

Pressure dew point

6908

Air always contains water in the form of vapour. As air can be compressed, but water cannot, the
water separates to form condensation during compression. The pressure dew point is the temperature
to which compressed air can be cooled down without condensation occurring.
In order to be able to provide sufficiently dry air for the system the pressure dew point should be
reduced to min. 10 C below the lowest ambient temperature of the air pipe.
Example: At an operating temperature of 20 C a pressure dew point of 10 C should prevent further
condensation.

NOTE
The indicated specification is a minimum requirement, i.e. the products may have a longer life. This
can be achieved by:
- lower particle concentration
- lower humidity
- very low or no addition of oil.
Mixing of synthetic oils with mineral oils can lead to failure of moving parts due to adherence or
clotting.
AirBoxes can be operated in the range of 0...55 C.
In case of low temperatures (< 0 C) take additional measures to prevent freezing or solidifying of
condensate, humidity etc.

Approved lubricants for lubricated compressed air

6379

If lubricated compressed air is used:

Only use oils of the class 1 (without additives) to ISO VG10!
The oil must not attack the materials used. This is mainly valid for the sealing materials and
plastics mentioned below.
For resistance to other lubricants please contact the manufacturer.

Sealing materials and plastics used for the AirBox

6380

NBR and FPM are used as sealing materials.

PBT and PC are used as plastics.

135

ifm AS-Interface manual tips and tricks for users edition 2.1

2012-09-26

Device descriptions

4.11.5

Device description field modules AirBox (screw mounting, AC20nn)

LED behaviour AirBox (AC20nn)

6431

Diagnostic LED

Description

[PWR]

green

lights

AS-i voltage supply present

[AUX]

green

lights

external voltage supply present 24 V DC

[I1]...[I4]
[O1]...[O2]

yellow

lights

binary input/output is switched on

136

ifm AS-Interface manual tips and tricks for users edition 2.1
Device descriptions

4.12

2012-09-26
Device description field modules AirBox (quick mounting, AC52nn)

Device description field modules AirBox (quick

mounting, AC52nn)

Operating conditions, installation .............................................................................................. 137

Installing quick mounting modules ............................................................................................ 138
Electrical connection ................................................................................................................. 144
Addressing ................................................................................................................................ 144
Pneumatics................................................................................................................................ 145
LED behaviour (AC52nn) .......................................................................................................... 147
6386

Examples:

AC5228

4.12.1

AC5270

Operating conditions, installation

6397

Protection rating of the devices depending on the version IP 65 (with silencer E75232) and IP 67
with common exhaust (tube connection to lead the exhaust air of the AirBox away e.g. from the
wet area).
In dusty environments the AirBox can be installed with the filter facing downwards.
To ensure the protection rating:
- Cover the unused M12 sockets using the protective caps E73004!
- Permissible tightening torque of the protective caps = 0.6...0.8 Nm.
Permissible tightening torque of the M12 connectors = 0.60.8 Nm.
The flat cable must not end in the device and must be sealed outside of the device with the flat
cable seal E70413 (IP 67) or the heat-shrink cap E70113 ( Sealing the AS-i flat cable end
( page 23)).
The flat cable cannot be branched in the lower part.
Branching must be implemented using corresponding accessories (e.g. E70381).
Avoid build-up of dirt and dust on the upper and lower parts so that the locking mechanism is not
affected.

137

ifm AS-Interface manual tips and tricks for users edition 2.1
Device descriptions

4.12.2

2012-09-26
Device description field modules AirBox (quick mounting, AC52nn)

Installing quick mounting modules

Installation variants.................................................................................................................... 139

Adjusting the cable guide on the lower part .............................................................................. 140
Adjusting the cable guide on the upper part ............................................................................. 141
Installing the device................................................................................................................... 142
Opening / uninstalling the device .............................................................................................. 143
6847

Example for quick mounting module: AC5243

In this documentation, installation is shown
only with external supply of the outputs (with black
AS-i cable).

138

ifm AS-Interface manual tips and tricks for users edition 2.1
Device descriptions

2012-09-26
Device description field modules AirBox (quick mounting, AC52nn)

Installation variants
6634

With the supplied lower part the flat cable can be aligned in three directions.
Pos. 1

>

Orientation horizontally from left to right

(= factory setting).

If this preset orientation is correct for the

application, continue with Installing the
device ( page 142)

Pos. 2

>

Orientation vertically from bottom to top.

Pos. 3

>

Orientation horizontally from right to left.

139

ifm AS-Interface manual tips and tricks for users edition 2.1
Device descriptions

2012-09-26
Device description field modules AirBox (quick mounting, AC52nn)

Adjusting the cable guide on the lower part

6635

1.

Remove the flat cable guide (1) from the

lower part.
Turn the flat cable guide (1) according to
the requested cable direction.

2.

Insert the flat cable guide into the lower

part according to the requested cable
direction.
>

140

The visible position number (here: 2)

indicates the selected cable direction.

ifm AS-Interface manual tips and tricks for users edition 2.1
Device descriptions

2012-09-26
Device description field modules AirBox (quick mounting, AC52nn)

Adjusting the cable guide on the upper part

6636

a)

Handling variant a

b)

Handling variant b

Turn the flat cable contact using a

screwdriver so that the triangle ( arrow)
points towards the requested cable guide
position.

Turn the flat cable contact with the

yellow-black flat cable guide (from the
lower part) so that the visible position
number (here: 1) corresponds to the
requested cable guide position.

141

ifm AS-Interface manual tips and tricks for users edition 2.1
Device descriptions

2012-09-26
Device description field modules AirBox (quick mounting, AC52nn)

Installing the device

6849

1.

Alignment of the flat cable on delivery.

2.

Place the upper part.

3.

Lock the device.

4.

142

Carefully place the yellow and optionally

the black AS-i flat cable into the profile
slot.

Take care in laying the AS-i flat

cable. The flat cable should be laid
straight for about 15 cm.

ifm AS-Interface manual tips and tricks for users edition 2.1
Device descriptions

2012-09-26
Device description field modules AirBox (quick mounting, AC52nn)

Opening / uninstalling the device

6853

1.

Unlock the device using a screwdriver.

2.

Open the locking until the end stop.

3.

Remove the upper part.

143

ifm AS-Interface manual tips and tricks for users edition 2.1
Device descriptions

4.12.3

2012-09-26
Device description field modules AirBox (quick mounting, AC52nn)

Electrical connection
6430

Do NOT connect the inputs to an external potential, because the inputs are supplied from the AS-i
voltage.
Do not lay the sensor cables in loops, to avoid interference.
Avoid direct tractive forces on the cables.

4.12.4

Addressing
6692

When mounted and wired, the module can be addressed with the addressing cable E70213 via the
integrated addressing interface.

ATTENTION
A connector other than the ifm jack plug E70213 can destroy the addressing socket!
Non ifm connectors (other than ifm article E70213) can cause short-circuits or irreparable
deformations of the socket contacts, resulting in a damaged addressing socket. As a consequence the
device can no longer communicate since it is permanently separated from the AS-i bus.
For addressing only use the ifm jack plug E70213!
If a slave is used with the ID code "A" (extended address mode enabled) combined with a master of
the 1st generation (version 2.0) then:

144

Set parameter P3=1.

Set output bit D3=0.
The output bit D3 must not be used.

Assign an address of 1A...31A to this slave.

ifm AS-Interface manual tips and tricks for users edition 2.1
Device descriptions

4.12.5

2012-09-26
Device description field modules AirBox (quick mounting, AC52nn)

Pneumatics
6401

AirBox

Operating pressure

Flow (at 6/5 bar)

2x3/2-way AirBox

28 bar

500 Nl/min

5/2-way AirBox

38 bar

500 Nl/min

5/3-way AirBox

38 bar

400 Nl/min

Slide valves are used in the AirBoxes, which are free from overlapping.
Connect the AirBox to the actuator in the shortest possible way, to avoid pressure losses and to
achieve faster switching times.
Connect the AirBox with the pneumatic system via tube fittings, outside calibration according to
CETOP standard RP 54 P.
To remove the tubes press on the clamping ring and pull out the tube at the same time.
The pneumatic output can be activated manually using the manual override: by pressing/releasing
or pressing/turning/locking depending on the version.
The electrical control has priority over the mechanical control (manual override).
The reduction of the tube diameter (e.g. from 8 mm to 6 mm) reduces among others the flow rate

NOTICE
Risk of permanent leaks or irreparable damage to the pneumatic components! Risk of malfunctions!
Operate the device only within the indicated operating pressure range ( table above).
Prepare the compressed air properly.
Operating pressure: maximum 8 bar, minimum (depending on the device) 2 bar or 3 bar.
Avoid pressure peaks above the permissible operating pressure by means of approved technical
measures.

NOTE
Provide all pneumatic connections of the AirBox either with suitable cover plugs or tube them
immediately upon installation. This prevents the ingress of moisture and dirt into the AirBox.
Once the AirBox has been operated with lubricated compressed air, it must continue to be
operated with lubricated air because the oil has removed the initial lubrication.

145

ifm AS-Interface manual tips and tricks for users edition 2.1
Device descriptions

2012-09-26
Device description field modules AirBox (quick mounting, AC52nn)

Purity of compressed air (specification)

6411

According to ISO 8573-1:2001 the air purity is divided into three classes:
1. The purity class of the solid particle content
2. The purity class for the humidity content
3. The purity class for the total oil content
The AirBoxes are suitable for non-lubricated compressed air of the purity classes: 6- 3- 1.
The AirBoxes are suitable for lubricated compressed air of the purity classes: 6- 3- 4
Meaning:
1. Solid particle content acc. to class 6: Max. particle size 5 m, max. particle density 5 mg/m3
2. Maximum water content acc. to class 3: Pressure dew point ( page 146, page 135) -20 C
Non-lubricated compressed air:
3. Maximum total oil content acc. to class 1: < 0.01 mg/m3.
Lubricated compressed air:
3. Maximum total oil content acc. to class 4: < 5 mg/m3, this corresponds to approx. 1 oil drop per
4 000 litres of air.

Pressure dew point

6377

Air always contains water in the form of vapour. As air can be compressed, but water cannot, the
water separates to form condensation during compression. The pressure dew point is the temperature
to which compressed air can be cooled down without condensation occurring.
In order to be able to provide sufficiently dry air for the system the pressure dew point should be
reduced to min. 10 C below the lowest ambient temperature of the air pipe.
Example: At an operating temperature of 20 C a pressure dew point of 10 C should prevent further
condensation.

NOTE
The indicated specification is a minimum requirement, i.e. the products may have a longer life. This
can be achieved by:
- lower particle concentration
- lower humidity
- very low or no addition of oil.
Mixing of synthetic oils with mineral oils can lead to failure of moving parts due to adherence or
clotting.
AirBoxes can be operated in the range of -10...+55 C.
In case of low temperatures (< 0 C) take additional measures to prevent freezing or solidifying of
condensate, humidity etc.

146

ifm AS-Interface manual tips and tricks for users edition 2.1

2012-09-26

Device descriptions

Device description field modules AirBox (quick mounting, AC52nn)

Approved lubricants for lubricated compressed air

6906

If lubricated compressed air is used:

Only use oils of the class 1 (without additives to DIN 51524 part 2!
The oil must not attack the materials used. This is mainly valid for the sealing materials and
plastics mentioned below.
For resistance to other lubricants please contact the manufacturer.

Sealing materials and plastics used for the AirBox

6482

NBR is used as sealing material.

PA, PC and POM are used as plastics.

4.12.6

LED behaviour (AC52nn)

6840

LED behaviour AirBox (AC52nn)

6821

Diagnostic LED

Description

[PWR]

green

lights

AS-i voltage supply present

[AUX]

green

lights

external voltage supply present 24 V DC

[I1]...[I4]
[O1]...[O2]

yellow

lights

binary input/output is switched on

[FAULT]

red

lights

AS-i communication error, e.g. slave address = 0

flashes

periphery fault **)

**) Indication periphery fault in the following cases:

- Lacking auxiliary voltage.
- Overload etc.

LED display of the logic PLC outputs

6858

For the AirBoxes AC52nn (quick mounting), the LEDs only signal the logic state of the PLC outputs.
>

The pneumatic output status does NOT necessarily correspond to the indicated status of these
LEDs.

>

The pneumatic output status is NOT indicated on the device.

>

The LEDs [O1]...[O4] indicate the data bits D0...D3 and additionally the attribution to the
pneumatic outputs.

147

ifm AS-Interface manual tips and tricks for users edition 2.1
Device descriptions

4.13

2012-09-26
Device description field modules CompactLine (AC24nn, to June 2010)

Device description field modules CompactLine

(AC24nn, to June 2010)

Operating conditions, installation .............................................................................................. 148

Electrical connection ................................................................................................................. 150
Addressing ................................................................................................................................ 150
LED behaviour (AC24nn) .......................................................................................................... 151
6389

Examples:

AC2410

4.13.1

AC2412

Operating conditions, installation

6412

Protection IP 67 (only if the AS-i flat cables AC4000 and AC4002 are used)

Select a flat mounting surface.

The entire bottom of the module must lie flat on the mounting surface.
Fix the lower part onto the mounting surface.
Insert the AS-i standard cable (yellow) and, if applicable, the cable for external power supply
(black). Ensure correct positioning of the cables in the profiled slot.
The flat cable must not end in the device and must be sealed outside of the device with the flat
cable seal E70413 (IP 67) or the heat-shrink cap E70113 ( Sealing the AS-i flat cable end
( page 23)).
The flat cable cannot be branched in the lower part.
Branching must be implemented using corresponding accessories (e.g. E70381).
Unused cable entries must be covered with the flat cable blank (E70399).

148

ifm AS-Interface manual tips and tricks for users edition 2.1
Device descriptions

2012-09-26
Device description field modules CompactLine (AC24nn, to June 2010)

To ensure the protection rating:

- Cover the unused M12 sockets using the protective caps E73004!
- Permissible tightening torque of the protective caps = 0.6...0.8 Nm.
Permissible tightening torque of the M12 connectors = 0.60.8 Nm.

Tightening torques
6414

Pos.

Tightening torque

For element

0.8...1.2 Nm

Screws for connecting the upper part to the lower part

2.0...2.4 Nm

Mounting screws with washers and tooth lock washers

0.6...0.8 Nm

M12 connector

max. 1.0 Nm

Mounting screw without stainless steel sleeve, with washer

4 / 4a

2.0...2.4 Nm

Mounting screw with stainless steel sleeve, washer and tooth lock
washer (in case of heavy mechanical stress of the device)

149

ifm AS-Interface manual tips and tricks for users edition 2.1
Device descriptions

4.13.2

2012-09-26
Device description field modules CompactLine (AC24nn, to June 2010)

Electrical connection
6477

Digital modules: Do NOT connect the inputs to an external potential, when the inputs are supplied
from the AS-i voltage.
Do not lay the sensor cables in loops, to avoid interference.
Avoid direct tractive forces on the cables.

4.13.3

Addressing
6415

Address the module with the addressing unit...

either prior to installation with the addressing cable E70423,

or with the IR addressing adapter E70211 ( Infrared addressing ( page 105)).

Infrared addressing
6350

The safe AS-i module also offers the option of infrared addressing with the addressing unit AC1154
and the addressing cable E70211.
Addressing the module
Switch off the AS-i power supply
Disconnect the AS-i master or use the jumper on the ifm AS-i power supply to interrupt
communication
Switch on the AS-i power supply
Connect the infrared addressing cable to the module
Select an address and remove the addressing cable
Switch off the AS-i power supply
Connect the AS-i master again or use the jumper on the ifm AS-i power supply to start
communication again
Switch on the AS-i power supply
When the AS-i power supply is switched on and off, the module is reset.

150

ifm AS-Interface manual tips and tricks for users edition 2.1

2012-09-26

Device descriptions

Device description field modules CompactLine (AC24nn, to June 2010)

4.13.4

LED behaviour (AC24nn)

6432

Diagnostic LED

Description

[AS-i]

green

lights

AS-i voltage supply present

[AUX]

green

lights

external voltage supply present 24 V DC

[I1]...[I4]
[O1]...[O4]

yellow

lights

binary input/output is switched on

[FAULT]

red

lights

AS-i communication error, e.g. slave address = 0

flashes

periphery fault **)

**) Indication periphery fault in the following cases:

- Lacking auxiliary voltage (only where the inputs of the modules are supplied via AUX)
- Overload etc.

151

ifm AS-Interface manual tips and tricks for users edition 2.1
Device descriptions

4.14

2012-09-26
Device description field modules CompactLine (AC24nn, as from June 2010)

Device description field modules CompactLine

(AC24nn, as from June 2010)

Operating conditions, installation .............................................................................................. 152

Electrical connection ................................................................................................................. 156
Addressing ................................................................................................................................ 156
LED behaviour (AC24nn) .......................................................................................................... 157
11306

Examples:

AC2410

4.14.1

AC2412

Operating conditions, installation

6412

Protection IP 67 (only if the AS-i flat cables AC4000 and AC4002 are used)

Select a flat mounting surface.

The entire bottom of the module must lie flat on the mounting surface.
Fix the lower part onto the mounting surface.
Insert the AS-i standard cable (yellow) and, if applicable, the cable for external power supply
(black). Ensure correct positioning of the cables in the profiled slot.
The flat cable must not end in the device and must be sealed outside of the device with the flat
cable seal E70413 (IP 67) or the heat-shrink cap E70113 ( Sealing the AS-i flat cable end
( page 23)).
The flat cable cannot be branched in the lower part.
Branching must be implemented using corresponding accessories (e.g. E70381).
Unused cable entries must be covered with the flat cable blank (E70399).

152

ifm AS-Interface manual tips and tricks for users edition 2.1
Device descriptions

2012-09-26
Device description field modules CompactLine (AC24nn, as from June 2010)

To ensure the protection rating:

- Cover the unused M12 sockets using the protective caps E73004!
- Permissible tightening torque of the protective caps = 0.6...0.8 Nm.
Permissible tightening torque of the M12 connectors = 0.60.8 Nm.

Tightening torques, general

11308

Pos.

Tightening torque

For element

1.8 Nm

Mounting screws, size M4, with washers

1.2...1.4 Nm

Connecting screws upper part with lower part, size M3.5

Functional earth springs

1.8 Nm

Mounting screw, size M4...M5, with washer

0.8...1.5 Nm

M12 connector

153

ifm AS-Interface manual tips and tricks for users edition 2.1
Device descriptions

2012-09-26
Device description field modules CompactLine (AC24nn, as from June 2010)

Tightening torques for AC2471, AC2474, AC2477

11310

Premounted at the factory: stainless steel sleeve (position 4a).

Pos.

Tightening torque

For element

2.0...2.4 Nm

Mounting screws, size M4, with washer and tooth lock washer

1.2...1.4 Nm

Connecting screws upper part with lower part, size M3,5

3
4

Functional earth springs

2.0...2.4 Nm

4a
5

154

Mounting screw, size M4...M5, with washer and tooth lock washer
Tubular rivet premounted in the mounting hole

0.8...1.5 Nm

M12 connector

ifm AS-Interface manual tips and tricks for users edition 2.1
Device descriptions

2012-09-26
Device description field modules CompactLine (AC24nn, as from June 2010)

Tightening torques for mounting set E70402

11312

Scope of delivery E70402:

10 stainless steel sleeves,
30 washers and
30 tooth lock washers
for mounting in case of high mechanical stress of the CompactLine modules
Use one stainless steel sleeve (position 4a) per module!

Pos.

Tightening torque

For element

2.0...2.4 Nm

Mounting screws, size M4, with washers and tooth lock washers

1.2...1.4 Nm

Connecting screws upper part with lower part, size M3,5

Functional earth springs

max. 1.8 Nm

Mounting screw without stainless steel sleeve

4, 4a

2.0...2.4 Nm

Mounting screw with stainless steel sleeve, washer and tooth lock
washer (in case of heavy mechanical stress of the device)

0.8...1.5 Nm

M12 connector

155

ifm AS-Interface manual tips and tricks for users edition 2.1
Device descriptions

4.14.2

2012-09-26
Device description field modules CompactLine (AC24nn, as from June 2010)

Electrical connection
6477

Digital modules: Do NOT connect the inputs to an external potential, when the inputs are supplied
from the AS-i voltage.
Do not lay the sensor cables in loops, to avoid interference.
Avoid direct tractive forces on the cables.

4.14.3

Addressing
6415

Address the module with the addressing unit...

either prior to installation with the addressing cable E70423,

or with the IR addressing adapter E70211 ( Infrared addressing ( page 105)).

Infrared addressing
6350

The safe AS-i module also offers the option of infrared addressing with the addressing unit AC1154
and the addressing cable E70211.
Addressing the module
Switch off the AS-i power supply
Disconnect the AS-i master or use the jumper on the ifm AS-i power supply to interrupt
communication
Switch on the AS-i power supply
Connect the infrared addressing cable to the module
Select an address and remove the addressing cable
Switch off the AS-i power supply
Connect the AS-i master again or use the jumper on the ifm AS-i power supply to start
communication again
Switch on the AS-i power supply
When the AS-i power supply is switched on and off, the module is reset.

156

ifm AS-Interface manual tips and tricks for users edition 2.1

2012-09-26

Device descriptions

Device description field modules CompactLine (AC24nn, as from June 2010)

4.14.4

LED behaviour (AC24nn)

11314

Diagnostic LED

Description

[AS-i]

green

lights

AS-i voltage supply present

[AUX]

green

lights

external voltage supply present 24 V DC

[I1]...[I4]
[O1]...[O4]

yellow

lights

binary input/output is switched on

[FLT]

red

lights

AS-i communication error, e.g. slave address = 0

flashes

periphery fault **)

**) Indication periphery fault in the following cases:

- Lacking auxiliary voltage
- Overload etc.

157

ifm AS-Interface manual tips and tricks for users edition 2.1

2012-09-26

Device descriptions

4.15

Device description field modules ProcessLine

Device description field modules ProcessLine

Operating conditions, installation .............................................................................................. 158

Electrical connection ................................................................................................................. 159
Addressing ................................................................................................................................ 159
Connecting analogue periphery ................................................................................................ 160
LED behaviour (AC29nn) .......................................................................................................... 164
6391

Example:

AC2910

4.15.1

Operating conditions, installation

6416

Protection IP 69K

Mount the device on a mounting surface electrically connected to the machine ground.

To ensure the protection rating:

- The unused M12 sockets must remain closed by the E70297 protective caps!
- Permissible tightening torque of the protective caps = 0.6...0.8 Nm.
Do not remove the installed protective cap E70297 from the M12 socket until directly before
connecting the plug to the M12 socket.
Permissible tightening torque of the M12 connectors = 0.60.8 Nm.
The integrated end stop protects the O-ring in the M12 socket against over-tightening of the nut:

158

Article

As from production status

AC2900

AE

AC2904

AL

AC2910

AJ

AC2916

AE

AC2923

AE

E11775

AD

E11847

AD

ifm AS-Interface manual tips and tricks for users edition 2.1

2012-09-26

Device descriptions

4.15.2

Device description field modules ProcessLine

Electrical connection
6348

Digital modules: Do NOT connect the inputs to an external potential, because the inputs are
supplied from the AS-i voltage.
Do not lay the sensor cables in loops, to avoid interference.
Avoid direct tractive forces on the cables.
The round cable connected to AS-i / AUX should not be longer than 2 m.
Only AC2916, AC2923:
The device shall be supplied from an isolating transformer having a secondary listed fuse rated as
noted in the following table.
Wire cross section control
circuit

4.15.3

Maximum nominal current

of the protective equipment [A]

[AWG]

[mm]

22

0,32

20

0,52

18

0,82

16

1,3

10

14

2,1

20

12

3,3

25

Addressing
6418

For addressing the module, a 2/4-wire jumper is connected to the M12 plug (AS-i/AUX).
AC2910: In the AS-i network the module functions as two independent A/B slaves.
In the factory setting, initially only the first slave gives a signal on address 0. It can be addressed to
any address between 1A...31B. Once this slave is addressed, the second slave is automatically
indicated on the display of the AC1144 with address 0 and can then also be addressed to any address
between 1A...31B.
Both slaves can be assigned any A/B addresses, e.g. 3A/6A or 9A/25B. No address must be assigned
twice (e.g. 3A/3A or 9B/9B).
Restore the factory setting (address both slaves to 0):
Using the addressing unit AC1144 the factory setting of the module is restored by writing a 0 to ID1 of
the second slave (factory setting ID1 = 2) by the internal software.
If a slave is used with the ID code "A" (extended address mode enabled) combined with a master of
the 1st generation (version 2.0) then:

Set parameter P3=1.

Set output bit D3=0.
The output bit D3 must not be used.

Assign an address of 1A...31A to this slave.

159

ifm AS-Interface manual tips and tricks for users edition 2.1
Device descriptions

4.15.4

2012-09-26
Device description field modules ProcessLine

Connecting analogue periphery

Analogue inputs 4...20 mA (AC2916)........................................................................................ 161

Analogue inputs 4...20 mA (AC2923)........................................................................................ 162
Parameter setting (AC2916, AC2923) ...................................................................................... 163
Measuring range (AC2916, AC2923)........................................................................................ 163
6500

To ensure the protection rating:

- The unused M12 sockets must remain closed by the E70297 protective caps!
- Permissible tightening torque of the protective caps = 0.6...0.8 Nm.
Do not remove the installed protective cap E70297 from the M12 socket until directly before
connecting the plug to the M12 socket.
Permissible tightening torque of the M12 connectors = 0.60.8 Nm.
Avoid direct tractive forces on the cables.

160

ifm AS-Interface manual tips and tricks for users edition 2.1
Device descriptions

2012-09-26
Device description field modules ProcessLine

Analogue inputs 4...20 mA (AC2916)

6614

NOTE
Sensor supply connections (pins 1, 3) and AS-i are electrically connected.
The module has NO connection option for an external supply from the black AUX flat cable.
The analogue input is between pin 2 and pin 3; it is thus always electrically connected to AS-i.
2-wire and 3-wire sensors for which the provided current supply of the module from AS-i is not
sufficient and which have NO electrical connection to other potentials can be connected without any
problems.
If the sensor is to obtain its operating current from an external source, this source must have NO
electrical connection to any other electrical network, because otherwise the AS-i connection of the
module will have a forbidden electrical connection.

When the sensors are supplied from AS-i the load must not exceed 380 mA, the load for an
individual sensor connection must not exceed 200 mA.

Wiring 2-wire sensor without own supply

Pin 1 = sensor supply +24 V
Pin 2 = analogue input AI+
Pin 3 = sensor supply 0 V / analogue input AIPin 4 = n.c.
Pin 5 = functional earth

Wiring 2-wire sensor with electrically isolated and earth-free supply

Pin 1 = sensor supply +24 V
Pin 2 = analogue input AI+
Pin 3 = sensor supply 0 V / analogue input AIPin 4 = n.c.
Pin 5 = functional earth

Wiring 3-wire sensor without own supply

Pin 1 = sensor supply +24 V
Pin 2 = analogue input AI+
Pin 3 = sensor supply 0 V / analogue input AIPin 4 = n.c.
Pin 5 = functional earth

161

ifm AS-Interface manual tips and tricks for users edition 2.1
Device descriptions

2012-09-26
Device description field modules ProcessLine

Analogue inputs 4...20 mA (AC2923)

6615

NOTE
Sensor supply connections (pins 1, 3) and AS-i are electrically connected.
The module has NO connection option for an external supply from the black AUX flat cable.
The analogue input is between pin 2 and pin 3; it is thus always electrically connected to AS-i.
2-wire and 3-wire sensors for which the provided current supply of the module from AS-i is not
sufficient and which have NO electrical connection to other potentials can be connected without any
problems.
If the sensor is to obtain its operating current from an external source, this source must have NO
electrical connection to any other electrical network, because otherwise the AS-i connection of the
module will have a forbidden electrical connection.
For 2-wire or 3-wire sensors without own supply:
Establish an external link between pin 3 and pin 4!
When the sensors are supplied from AS-i the load must not exceed 380 mA, the load for an
individual sensor connection must not exceed 200 mA.
Wiring 2-wire sensor with own, grounded supply
Pin 1 = sensor supply +24 V
Pin 2 = analogue input AI+
Pin 3 = sensor supply 0 V
Pin 4 = analogue input AIPin 5 = functional earth

Wiring 2-wire sensor without own supply

Pin 1 = sensor supply +24 V
Pin 2 = analogue input AI+
Pin 3 = sensor supply 0 V
Pin 4 = analogue input AIPin 5 = functional earth

Establish an external link between pin 3 and pin 4!

Wiring 3-wire sensor without own supply

Pin 1 = sensor supply +24 V
Pin 2 = analogue input AI+
Pin 3 = sensor supply 0 V
Pin 4 = analogue input AIPin 5 = functional earth

162

Establish an external link between pin 3 and pin 4!

ifm AS-Interface manual tips and tricks for users edition 2.1

2012-09-26

Device descriptions

Device description field modules ProcessLine

Wiring 4-wire sensor without own supply

Pin 1 = sensor supply +24 V
Pin 2 = analogue input AI+
Pin 3 = sensor supply 0 V
Pin 4 = analogue input AIPin 5 = functional earth

Parameter setting (AC2916, AC2923)

6822

Parameter bit Designation

Description

P0

0 = 60 Hz filter is active

suppression 50 Hz / 60 Hz

1 = 50 Hz filter is active
P1,
P2

channel activation

P3

periphery fault when value

outside measuring range

P1

P2

channel
1

channel
2

channel
3

channel
4

on

off

off

off

on

on

off

off

on

on

on

off

on

on

on

on

0 = periphery fault indication is not active

1 = periphery fault indication is active

Changing slave parameter data ( page 41)

Measuring range (AC2916, AC2923)

11316

Analogue input module, measuring range = 4...20 mA

Range
[mA]

Units
[dec]

Units
[hex]

LED yellow
AI1AI4

Periphery fault

Meaning

< 3.4

(32768) *
32767

(8000) *
7FFF

flashes

yes ***

wire break

3.43.59

(34003599) *
32767

(0D480E0F) *
7FFF

flashes

no

below nominal
range

3.622

360022000

0E1055F0

lights

no

extended and
nominal range **

22.0123

(2200123000) *
32767

(55F159D8) *
7FFF

flashes

no

overcontrol

> 23

32767

7FFF

flashes

yes ***

overflow

The master replaces the transmitted value ( value in brackets) by the preset value 3276710 / 7FFF16.

**

The accuracy is only guaranteed in the nominal range (4...20 mA), but not in the extended nominal range.

***

only if parameter bit 3 = 1

163

ifm AS-Interface manual tips and tricks for users edition 2.1

2012-09-26

Device descriptions

Device description field modules ProcessLine

4.15.5

LED behaviour (AC29nn)

6461

LED behaviour of the digital modules

6808

Diagnostic LED

Description

[AS-i]

green

lights

AS-i voltage supply present

[AUX]

green

lights

external voltage supply present 24 V DC

[I1]...[I4]
[O1]...[O4]

yellow

lights

binary input/output is switched on

[FAULT]

red

lights

AS-i communication error, e.g. slave address = 0

flashes

periphery fault **)

**) Indication periphery fault in the following cases:

- Lacking auxiliary voltage (only where the inputs of the modules are supplied via AUX)
- Overload etc.

LED behaviour (AC2916)

6823

Diagnostic LED

Description

[PWR]

green

[AI-1]...[AI-4]

yellow

[AI-2]...[AI-4]

yellow

[FAULT]

red

lights

AS-i voltage supply present

lights

analogue signal in the measuring range

flashes

analogue signal outside the measuring range (overflow), no sensor

connected or wire break

off

no sensor connected (at least one LED flashes, because not all channels
can be deactivated via the parameter bit P1/P2 (channel activation)
(channel 1 is always activated))

lights

AS-i communication error, e.g. slave address = 0

flashes

periphery fault **)

**) Indication periphery fault in the following cases:

- At least one of the analogue signals is outside of the value range.
- Nothing connected to at least one analogue channel, although the respective channel is activated.
- In case of short circuit or overload of the sensor supply.

164

ifm AS-Interface manual tips and tricks for users edition 2.1

2012-09-26

Device descriptions

Device description field modules ProcessLine

LED behaviour (AC2923)

6824

Diagnostic LED

Description

[PWR]

green

[AI-1]...[AI-4]

yellow

[AI-2]...[AI-4]

yellow

[FAULT]

red

lights

AS-i voltage supply present

lights

analogue signal in the measuring range

flashes

analogue signal outside the measuring range (overflow), no sensor

connected or wire break

off

no sensor connected (at least one LED flashes, because not all channels
can be deactivated via the parameter bit P1/P2 (channel activation)
(channel 1 is always activated))

lights

AS-i communication error, e.g. slave address = 0

flashes

periphery fault **)

**) Indication periphery fault in the following cases:

- At least one of the analogue signals is outside of the value range.
- Nothing connected to at least one analogue channel, although the respective channel is activated.
- In case of short circuit or overload of the sensor supply.

165

ifm AS-Interface manual tips and tricks for users edition 2.1

2012-09-26

Device descriptions

4.16

Device description ProcessLine splitter

Device description ProcessLine splitter

Splitter (E70354, E70377)......................................................................................................... 167

Splitter (E70454) ....................................................................................................................... 169
6767

Examples:

E70354

166

E70377

E70454

ifm AS-Interface manual tips and tricks for users edition 2.1

2012-09-26

Device descriptions

4.16.1

Device description ProcessLine splitter

Splitter (E70354, E70377)

6632

E70354

E70377

M12 insulation displacement connector of the

yellow AND black AS-i flat cable:
Distribution of the AS-i voltage AND the external
24 V supply

Flat cable branch of the yellow OR black AS-i flat

cable:
distribution of the AS-i voltage OR the external 24
V supply

Current rating = 2 A

Current rating = 8 A

The two cable ducts are electrically separated.

The two cable ducts are electrically connected.

Material:
metal parts: stainless steel 316L (1.4404)
blanks: FPM (Viton)
O-ring: EPDM

Protection IP 69K

When replacing the splitter the pierced points on the AS-i flat cable must either be used exactly
again or be placed within the black seal area of the splitter.

1.

Choose a plane mounting surface.

2.

E70354: Insert the AS-i flat cable (yellow)

into the "AS-i" cable duct and the 24 V flat
cable (black) into the other cable duct.

Fix the lower part onto the mounting

surface (mounting holes ). The mounting
screws are not supplied.

E70377: Insert 2 yellow AS-i flat cables for

the AS-i voltage OR 2 black cables for the
external auxiliary voltage into the cable
ducts.
Ensure correct positioning of the cables in
the profiled slot ( figure).

167

ifm AS-Interface manual tips and tricks for users edition 2.1

2012-09-26

Device descriptions

Device description ProcessLine splitter

NOT like this!

Examples for INCORRECTLY inserted flat cable

Cover the unused cable duct or cable duct

entry with the supplied cable blank (blue).

3.

Place the upper part and tighten the

nuts alternately (nuts supplied)
tightening torque 2.5 Nm.

4.

5.

168

Take care in laying the AS-i flat cable.

The flat cable should be laid straight for
about 15 cm.

Wiring M12 socket:

E70354:

1 = AS-i +
2 = AUX 3 = AS-i 4 = AUX +
5 = n.c.

Do not remove the installed protective cap

E70297 from the M12 socket until directly
before connecting the plug to the M12
socket.
Permissible tightening torque of the M12
connectors = 0.60.8 Nm.

ifm AS-Interface manual tips and tricks for users edition 2.1

2012-09-26

Device descriptions

4.16.2

Device description ProcessLine splitter

Splitter (E70454)
6650

E70454
The T splitter allows tapping the AS-i voltage (yellow flat cable) via the M12 socket (current rating 2 A).

Housing material high-grade stainless steel (316L/1.4404)

Protection IP 69K

When replacing the splitter the pierced points on the AS-i flat cable must either be used exactly
again or be placed within the black seal area of the splitter.

1.
2.

Choose a plane mounting surface.

Screw the lower part onto the mounting surface. The mounting screw is not supplied.
Insert the AS-i flat cable (yellow) into the
cable duct. Place the cable correctly in the
profile slot.
Place the upper part ( figure on the left).

3.

Press the upper part against the lower part.

4.

>

Insert the upper part into the locking on

both sides using a screwdriver ( figure).
OR:
Push the upper part into the locking on
both sides using a suitably large pipe
wrench.

The upper part is correctly snapped in

place
( figure).

169

ifm AS-Interface manual tips and tricks for users edition 2.1

2012-09-26

Device descriptions

Device description ProcessLine splitter

NOT like this!

Examples for INCORRECTLY mounted
splitter

5.

6.

yellow flat
cable:
1 = AS-i +
2 = n.c.
3 = AS-i 4 = n.c.
5 = n.c.

Take care in laying the AS-i flat cable.

The flat cable should be laid straight for
about 15 cm.

black flat cable: Do not remove the installed protective cap

E70297 from the M12 socket until directly
1 = + 24 V
before connecting the plug to the M12
2 = n.c.
socket.
3=0V
4 = n.c.
Permissible tightening torque of the M12
5 = n.c.
connectors = 0.60.8 Nm.

Unlocking / uninstalling the upper part

6826

1.

Place two screwdrivers on the housing and

push evenly towards the bottom.

2.

Remove the upper part.

170

ifm AS-Interface manual tips and tricks for users edition 2.1
Device descriptions

4.17

2012-09-26
Device description IP 67 splitter

Device description IP 67 splitter

FC insulation displacement connector AC5005 ........................................................................ 172

FC insulation displacement connector E70096......................................................................... 173
FC insulation displacement connector E70381......................................................................... 174
FC insulation displacement connector E70481......................................................................... 175
FC insulation displacement connector E70483......................................................................... 176
FC insulation displacement connector, E70485, E70486 ......................................................... 177
FC insulation displacement connector E70487......................................................................... 178
FC insulation displacement connector E70498, E70499 ......................................................... 179
Mounting (e.g. E70381)............................................................................................................. 180
6

6770

171

ifm AS-Interface manual tips and tricks for users edition 2.1
Device descriptions

4.17.1

2012-09-26
Device description IP 67 splitter

FC insulation displacement connector AC5005

11318

M12 insulation displacement connector of the yellow OR black AS-i flat cable:
distribution of the AS-i voltage OR the external 24 V supply

Ambient temperature: -25...70 C

Materials:
Housing: PA 6-GF-FR
Metal parts : nickel-plated brass

Current rating = 2 A

To guarantee the protection rating: if the AS-i flat cable ends outside of the device, use the flat
cable seal E70413 (IP 67) or the heat-shrink cap E70113 ( Sealing the AS-i flat cable end
( page 23)).

NOTE
The longest distance (total cable length) from the master must be max. 100 m. Greater distances
require special measures, chapter Extension of the AS-i cable length ( page 182).
Take into account the connection cables (spurs) when calculating the cable length!
The maximum possible cable length might be reduced in case of a reduced cable cross section or
when other cable types are used.
Wiring:

172

Yellow flat
cable:

Black flat
cable:

1 = AS-i +
2 = n.c.
3 = AS-i 4 = n.c.

1 = AUX +
2 = n.c.
3 = AUX 4 = n.c.

ifm AS-Interface manual tips and tricks for users edition 2.1
Device descriptions

4.17.2

2012-09-26
Device description IP 67 splitter

FC insulation displacement connector E70096

11317

M12 insulation displacement connector of the yellow OR black AS-i flat cable:
distribution of the AS-i voltage OR the external 24 V supply

Ambient temperature: -25...75 C

Materials:
Housing: PA

Current rating = 2 A

Installation instructions:
First separate the fixture (orange) from the insulation displacement connector.
Insert the cable in the fixture and close the fixture.
Screw the fixture back on the insulation displacement connector.
To guarantee the protection rating: if the AS-i flat cable ends outside of the device, use the flat
cable seal E70413 (IP 67) or the heat-shrink cap E70113 ( Sealing the AS-i flat cable end
( page 23)).

NOTE
The longest distance (total cable length) from the master must be max. 100 m. Greater distances
require special measures, chapter Extension of the AS-i cable length ( page 182).
Take into account the connection cables (spurs) when calculating the cable length!
The maximum possible cable length might be reduced in case of a reduced cable cross section or
when other cable types are used.
Wiring:
Yellow flat
cable:

Black flat
cable:

1 = AS-i +
2 = n.c.
3 = AS-i 4 = n.c.

1 = AUX +
2 = n.c.
3 = AUX 4 = n.c.

173

ifm AS-Interface manual tips and tricks for users edition 2.1
Device descriptions

4.17.3

2012-09-26
Device description IP 67 splitter

FC insulation displacement connector E70381

11319

Flat cable branch of the yellow OR black AS-i flat cable:

distribution of the AS-i voltage OR the external 24 V supply

Ambient temperature: -25...75 C

Materials:
Housing: PA 6 GF35 Grivory

Tightening torque upper part to lower part: 1.65 Nm

Current rating = 8 A

To guarantee the protection rating: if the AS-i flat cable ends outside of the device, use the flat
cable seal E70413 (IP 67) or the heat-shrink cap E70113 ( Sealing the AS-i flat cable end
( page 23)).

NOTE
The longest distance (total cable length) from the master must be max. 100 m. Greater distances
require special measures, chapter Extension of the AS-i cable length ( page 182).
Take into account the connection cables (spurs) when calculating the cable length!
The maximum possible cable length might be reduced in case of a reduced cable cross section or
when other cable types are used.

174

ifm AS-Interface manual tips and tricks for users edition 2.1
Device descriptions

4.17.4

2012-09-26
Device description IP 67 splitter

FC insulation displacement connector E70481

11320

M12 insulation displacement connector of the yellow AND black AS-i flat cable:
Distribution of the AS-i voltage AND the external 24 V supply

Ambient temperature: -25...75 C

Materials:
Housing: PA 6 GF35 Grivory
Socket: PUR

Tightening torque upper part to lower part: 1.65 Nm

Current rating = 4 A

Cable length =1 m

To guarantee the protection rating: if the AS-i flat cable ends outside of the device, use the flat
cable seal E70413 (IP 67) or the heat-shrink cap E70113 ( Sealing the AS-i flat cable end
( page 23)).

NOTE
The longest distance (total cable length) from the master must be max. 100 m. Greater distances
require special measures, chapter Extension of the AS-i cable length ( page 182).
Take into account the connection cables (spurs) when calculating the cable length!
The maximum possible cable length might be reduced in case of a reduced cable cross section or
when other cable types are used.
Wiring:
1 = AS-i +
2 = AUX 3 = AS-i 4 = AUX +
5 = n.c.

175

ifm AS-Interface manual tips and tricks for users edition 2.1
Device descriptions

4.17.5

2012-09-26
Device description IP 67 splitter

FC insulation displacement connector E70483

11321

M12 insulation displacement connector of the yellow AS-i flat cable: Distribution of the AS-i voltage

Ambient temperature: -25...75 C

Materials:
Housing: PA66 - GF25

Tightening torque upper part to lower part: 1.65 Nm

Current rating = 4 A

Cable length = 0.6 m

To guarantee the protection rating: if the AS-i flat cable ends outside of the device, use the flat
cable seal E70413 (IP 67) or the heat-shrink cap E70113 ( Sealing the AS-i flat cable end
( page 23)).

NOTE
The longest distance (total cable length) from the master must be max. 100 m. Greater distances
require special measures, chapter Extension of the AS-i cable length ( page 182).
Take into account the connection cables (spurs) when calculating the cable length!
The maximum possible cable length might be reduced in case of a reduced cable cross section or
when other cable types are used.
Wiring:
1 = AS-i +
2 = n.c.
3 = AS-i 4 = n.c.
5 = n.c.

176

ifm AS-Interface manual tips and tricks for users edition 2.1
Device descriptions

4.17.6

2012-09-26
Device description IP 67 splitter

FC insulation displacement connector, E70485, E70486

11322

M12 insulation displacement connector of the yellow AS-i flat cable: Distribution of the AS-i voltage

E70485

E70486

The units differ in the orientation of the M12 socket (keyway).

Ambient temperature: -25...75 C

Materials:
Housing: PA66 - GF25

Tightening torque upper part to lower part: 1.65 Nm

Current rating = 4 A

To guarantee the protection rating: if the AS-i flat cable ends outside of the device, use the flat
cable seal E70413 (IP 67) or the heat-shrink cap E70113 ( Sealing the AS-i flat cable end
( page 23)).

NOTE
The longest distance (total cable length) from the master must be max. 100 m. Greater distances
require special measures, chapter Extension of the AS-i cable length ( page 182).
Take into account the connection cables (spurs) when calculating the cable length!
The maximum possible cable length might be reduced in case of a reduced cable cross section or
when other cable types are used.
Wiring:
1 = AS-i +
2 = n.c.
3 = AS-i 4 = n.c.
5 = n.c.

177

ifm AS-Interface manual tips and tricks for users edition 2.1
Device descriptions

4.17.7

2012-09-26
Device description IP 67 splitter

FC insulation displacement connector E70487

11330

M12 insulation displacement connector of the yellow AND black AS-i flat cable:
Distribution of the AS-i voltage AND the external 24 V supply

Ambient temperature: -25...75 C

Materials:
Housing: PA66 - GF25

Tightening torque upper part to lower part: 1.65 Nm

Current rating = 4 A

To guarantee the protection rating: if the AS-i flat cable ends outside of the device, use the flat
cable seal E70413 (IP 67) or the heat-shrink cap E70113 ( Sealing the AS-i flat cable end
( page 23)).

NOTE
The longest distance (total cable length) from the master must be max. 100 m. Greater distances
require special measures, chapter Extension of the AS-i cable length ( page 182).
Take into account the connection cables (spurs) when calculating the cable length!
The maximum possible cable length might be reduced in case of a reduced cable cross section or
when other cable types are used.
Wiring:
1 = AS-i +
2 = AUX 3 = AS-i 4 = AUX +
5 = n.c.

178

ifm AS-Interface manual tips and tricks for users edition 2.1
Device descriptions

4.17.8

2012-09-26
Device description IP 67 splitter

FC insulation displacement connector E70498, E70499

11323

Flat cable insulation displacement connector of the yellow OR black AS-i flat cable:
distribution of the AS-i voltage OR the external 24 V supply
Adapter flat cable to round cable

Ambient temperature: -25...75 C

Materials:
Housing: PA 6 GF35 Grivory
Round cable: PUR
Core insulation: PVC

Tightening torque upper part to lower part: 1.65 Nm

Current rating = 4 A

To guarantee the protection rating: if the AS-i flat cable ends outside of the device, use the flat
cable seal E70413 (IP 67) or the heat-shrink cap E70113 ( Sealing the AS-i flat cable end
( page 23)).

Cable length:
E70498:
2m
E70499:
5m

NOTE
The longest distance (total cable length) from the master must be max. 100 m. Greater distances
require special measures, chapter Extension of the AS-i cable length ( page 182).
Take into account the connection cables (spurs) when calculating the cable length!
The maximum possible cable length might be reduced in case of a reduced cable cross section or
when other cable types are used.
Wiring:
(+)
brown
(-)
blue

179

ifm AS-Interface manual tips and tricks for users edition 2.1

2012-09-26

Device descriptions

4.17.9

Device description IP 67 splitter

Mounting (e.g. E70381)

11336

Disconnect the installation from power.

Choose a flat mounting surface and fix the
splitter on it (mounting hole pos. (1)). The
mounting screw is not supplied.
Loosen screw 2 (supplied with the unit) and
open the passive splitter.
Legend:
(1) mounting hole
(2) screw (tightening torque 1.65 Nm)

Insert the AS-i flat cable into the flat cable

ducts.
Place the cables correctly in the profile slot.

Close upper part.

Only mount this way:

To do so, first lift the upper part, then place it

parallel to the lower part so that the upper part is
not jammed. This is the only way to ensure that
the contacts pierce the flat cable vertically.

Do NOT mount as this:

Press the upper part against the lower part

and firmly tighten the screw (2).
Tightening torque = 1.65 Nm

To guarantee the protection rating: if the AS-i flat cable ends outside of the device, use the flat
cable seal E70413 (IP 67) or the heat-shrink cap E70113 ( Sealing the AS-i flat cable end
( page 23)).

180

ifm AS-Interface manual tips and tricks for users edition 2.1

2012-09-26

Device descriptions

4.18

Device description repeater, tuner, bus termination

Device description repeater, tuner, bus

termination

Extension of the AS-i cable length ............................................................................................ 182

Device description repeater ...................................................................................................... 185
Device description tuner............................................................................................................ 188
Device description passive bus termination.............................................................................. 191
6394

Examples:
Repeater

AC2225
Tuner as active bus
termination

AC1146
Passive bus termination

AC1147

181

ifm AS-Interface manual tips and tricks for users edition 2.1
Device descriptions

4.18.1

2012-09-26
Device description repeater, tuner, bus termination

Extension of the AS-i cable length

6675

The longest distance (total cable length) from the master must be max. 100 m. There are several
solutions for an extension by a further 100 m:
1. Repeater
2. Dual master in the centre of the machine
3. Bus termination at the end of the long cable
4. Tuner

Repeater
6862

Repeaters allow a cable extension by a further 100 m in AS-Interface. The number of possible
participants remains unchanged. Each repeater has an electrical separation which divides the network
into two segments. Each segment has its own voltage supply. The master segment can thus be
supplied with voltage via AS-i power supply 1 and the area behind the repeater via AS-i power
supply 2. This principle allows an increase in total current per AS-i network and improves the voltage
drop.
A repeater can also be used for safety reasons. A repeater is used to ensure that a short circuit on the
secondary circuit has no influence on the primary circuit. AS-i networks can thus be divided into
electrically isolated areas.
Each repeater has an internal propagation time which adds for series connection. This limits the
number of repeaters to be used, see comparison below.

Dual master in the centre of the machine

6863

Dual masters in the centre of the machine allow an extension of the AS-i cable by a further 100 m in
opposite directions. Distances of 200 m can thus be linked. One side effect is that twice the number of
AS-i participants can be connected.

Bus termination at the end of the long cable

6864

The passive bus termination minimises reflections on the end of the cable and must therefore be
connected to the end of the cable. The main effect of the bus termination is the improvement of the
AS-i telegram quality for long cables and the use of Safety at Work components.
In a branched network, the bus termination should be connected to the end of the cable that is the
furthest away from the AS-i power supply.
Only ONE bus termination must be installed in an AS-i network.
Check the AS-i telegram quality after installation of the bus termination with the AS-i analyser
AC1145.

182

ifm AS-Interface manual tips and tricks for users edition 2.1

2012-09-26

Device descriptions

Device description repeater, tuner, bus termination

Tuner
6865

The tuner is an active bus termination.

>

During the setup, the tuner independently checks different impedances for their effectiveness as
line termination.

>

In the resulting operation, the tuner activates the impedance value with the best telegram quality
and maintains this value constant.

An extension of the AS-i cable up to 200 m without additional repeater is possible.

Install the tuner at the point with the greatest distance to the AS-i power supply.

Comparison of cable extension methods

6676

There are different methods of extending the AS-i cable. The specified 100 m can be extended up to
600 m in extreme cases. The following table shows the different possibilities and the different methods
of cable extension.
Measure

Repeater

Dual master

Bus termination

Tuner

100 m

100 m

100 m

100 m

1x per master
1x per repeater

1x per master

1x per master

1x per master

yes

yes

no

no

uncritical

uncritical

critical

critical

Max. number of slaves

31 (single)
62 (A/B)

62 (single)
124 (A/B)

31 (single)
62 (A/B)

31 (single)
62 (A/B)

Cost/benefit per slave

(ranking) *)

6.2
(4)

2.8
(2)

0.95
(1)

6.13
(3)

< 2 repeaters in series

master in the centre

check voltage drop at

the end of the line

check voltage drop at

the end of the line

check telegram quality

check telegram quality

Extension by
Required power
supplies
Electrical separation
Voltage drop

Note

* Formula: cost/benefit = device cost / max. number of slaves

183

ifm AS-Interface manual tips and tricks for users edition 2.1
Device descriptions

2012-09-26
Device description repeater, tuner, bus termination

Application examples for cable extensions

6677

AS-i ControllerE
+ AS-i power supply

AS-i repeater
+ AS-i power supply

Figure: Example for AS-i cable extension with repeater

AS-i ControllerE
+ 2x AS-i power supply

Figure: Example for AS-i cable extension with dual master

184

AS-i repeater
+ AS-i power supply

ifm AS-Interface manual tips and tricks for users edition 2.1
Device descriptions

2012-09-26
Device description repeater, tuner, bus termination

AS-i ControllerE
+ AS-i power supply

Figure: Example for AS-i cable extension with bus termination

4.18.2

Device description repeater

6683

The AS-i repeater (AC2225) is used to extend the cable length of an AS-i network by another
100 m.

Max. 2 repeaters must be connected in series.

Electrical separation of the incoming AS-i line (= line 1) and of the outgoing AS-i line (= line 2).

A separate AS-i power supply is required for the outgoing AS-i line.

Example:
AS-i ControllerE
+ AS-i power supply

AS-i repeater
+ AS-i power supply

AS-i repeater
+ AS-i power supply

185

ifm AS-Interface manual tips and tricks for users edition 2.1
Device descriptions

2012-09-26
Device description repeater, tuner, bus termination

Electrical connection
6501

Disconnect the installation from power.

Connect the device as indicated on the terminals.
Line 1 = incoming AS-i line
Line 2 = outgoing AS-i line
Connections:
A+ = AS-i +
A- = AS-i -

Consider that an additional AS-i power supply is required for the outgoing AS-i line.
Incoming and outgoing AS-i lines must not be connected to each other, otherwise the electrical
separation of the repeater is eliminated!
Examples for cable extensions with repeaters:
AS-i network in star topology

186

ifm AS-Interface manual tips and tricks for users edition 2.1

2012-09-26

Device descriptions

Device description repeater, tuner, bus termination

AS-i network in line topology

AS-i network in string topology

M = AS-i master
PS = power supply
R = repeater
S = slave

1) Take into account all branches and spurs in the calculation of

the length!

LED behaviour repeater

6684

There are separate LEDs for the incoming and outgoing AS-i line.
Diagnostic LED

Description

[AS-i]

green

lights

AS-i voltage supply present

[FAULT]

red

lights

no AS-i communication

187

ifm AS-Interface manual tips and tricks for users edition 2.1

2012-09-26

Device descriptions

4.18.3

Device description repeater, tuner, bus termination

Device description tuner

6686

The tuner (AC1146) is an active bus termination.

Display of critical states by "traffic light" LEDs.

Extension of the cable to 200 m without additional repeater possible.

Current rating AS-i distribution socket = max. 1 A.

Install the tuner at the point with the greatest distance to the AS-i power supply.
Legend:
1 = AS-i M1 distribution socket M12
2 = rotary switch [Mode]
3 = button [Tune]
4 = LED AS-i power
5 = LED GREEN
6 = LED WARNING
7 = LED ERROR
Setting the operating modes with the rotary switch [Mode]:
Pos.

Description

off

passive bus termination (function similar to AC1147)

tuning

run

All other positions have no function.

188

ifm AS-Interface manual tips and tricks for users edition 2.1
Device descriptions

2012-09-26
Device description repeater, tuner, bus termination

Electrical connection
6503

1 = AS-i + (plus)
2 = AS-i - (minus)

Install the tuner at the point with the greatest distance to the AS-i power supply.
Example: AS-i cable extension with repeater and tuner

M = AS-i master
PS = power supply
R = repeater
S = slave
T = tuner

1) Take into account all branches and spurs in the calculation of the
length!

LED behaviour tuner

6685

Diagnostic LEDs

LED
colour

[AS-i Power]

LED lit

LED flashes

red

AS-i voltage ok
(> 26.5 V)

AS-i voltage too low

Traffic light LEDs

[GREEN]

green

normal communication:

---

Traffic light LEDs

[WARNING]

yellow

occasionally disturbed communication (1...5 % telegram

repetitions)

---

Traffic light LEDs

[ERROR]

red

disturbed communication (as from 6 % telegram

repetitions)

---

- telegram repetitions < 1 %

- AS-i voltage ok
- tuning active
- telegram quality ok

or
"Config Error"

>

The AS-i network is checked after pressing the button [Tune] in the mode [Tuning].

>

During this stage the traffic light LEDs alternately light green, yellow, red.

189

ifm AS-Interface manual tips and tricks for users edition 2.1
Device descriptions

2012-09-26
Device description repeater, tuner, bus termination

Set-up tuner
6693

Turn the [Mode] selector to position 2 [Tuning] using an appropriate tool (e.g. screwdriver).
Keep the button [Tune] pressed for more than 5 seconds.
>

The tuner checks the AS-i network.

>

The traffic light LEDs alternately flash red, yellow, green.

Do not carry out any changes during this stage, until only one LED of the traffic light LEDs is lit.
Set the rotary switch [Mode] to position 3 [Run].

NOTE
If the yellow or red LED is lit:
Check the AS-i network for faults, e.g.:
- frequency inverter too close to cables
- power cable
Briefly press the button [Tune] after checking the AS-i network (< 3 seconds).
>

190

The tuner is reset (reset function) and the telegram quality is checked again.

ifm AS-Interface manual tips and tricks for users edition 2.1
Device descriptions

4.18.4

2012-09-26
Device description repeater, tuner, bus termination

Device description passive bus termination

6697

Example:

AC1147

Advantages of the passive bus termination (AC1147):

- improvement of the signal quality,
- cable extension up to 200 m possible.

Maximum current consumption < 10 mA.

Connect maximum 2 repeaters in series if sub-networks > 100 m are installed.

Use maximum 1 AS-i bus termination per AS-i segment.
Install the bus termination at the point with the greatest distance to the AS-i power supply.
Use e.g. the FC insulation displacement connector E70096 or AC5005 for connecting AC1147.
Device description IP 67 splitter ( page 171)
After installation of the AC1147 test the signal quality of the AS-i network by means of the eAS-i
tester AC1145 or via the diagnostic options of the controller (e.g. number of telegram errors).
Examples:

B = bus termination
M = AS-i master
PS = power supply
R = repeater
S = slave

191

ifm AS-Interface manual tips and tricks for users edition 2.1
Device descriptions

2012-09-26
Device description repeater, tuner, bus termination

LED behaviour passive bus termination

6687

LED lit...

Description

green

AS-i voltage ok (> 26.5 V DC)

yellow

AS-i voltage too low (> 18.5 V DC)

192

ifm AS-Interface manual tips and tricks for users edition 2.1
Device descriptions

4.19

2012-09-26
Device description addressing units

Device description addressing units

Addressing unit AC1154 ........................................................................................................... 194

11349

NOTE
The following modules cannot be addressed with the addressing unit AC1144:
- modules in the extended addressing mode (with e.g. 4 inputs + 4 outputs
- modules with safe outputs
Address such modules with the addressing unit AC1154.

193

ifm AS-Interface manual tips and tricks for users edition 2.1
Device descriptions

4.19.1

2012-09-26
Device description addressing units

Addressing unit AC1154

Functions and features.............................................................................................................. 194

Structure of the addressing unit ................................................................................................ 195
Operating modes....................................................................................................................... 197
Error messages ......................................................................................................................... 206
11350

Functions and features

11352

The protection of operating personnel and system against possible danger is not guaranteed if the
sub-assembly is not operated in accordance with its intended use.
The device must be operated by qualified staff in accordance with these operating instructions.
Safety and correct functioning of the device and connected systems cannot be guaranteed if operated
in any way other than that described in these operating instructions.

NOTICE
The device will be destroyed when external voltage is applied to pin 2 and 4!
Use of the pins 2 and 4 is only permitted in conjunction with the E70211 infrared addressing adapter.

The addressing unit enables the writing of identification code ID1.

If the user has changed the ID code ID1 of a slave and uses the automatic address programming,
save the correct ID code 1 in the slave before installing the new slave!

194

ifm AS-Interface manual tips and tricks for users edition 2.1

2012-09-26

Device descriptions

Device description addressing units

Structure of the addressing unit

11353

The adapter is used to connect the AS-interface slave to the addressing unit AC1154. Most ASinterface slaves can be connected directly to the adapter without any accessories.
This includes among other: AS-i slaves with M12 screw connections. All AS-i slaves with a 3.5 mm
coaxial power connector addressing socket can be programmed using the E70213 addressing cable.
Like some AS-interface slaves the addressing unit is supplied with an infrared interface which can also
be used to establish the connection to AS-interface slaves (IR addressing adapter E70211).
Wiring of the M12 socket for the IR interface:
1 = AS-i +
2 = TTL
3 = AS-i 4 = TTL
5 = +5 V
A slave with a higher current consumption than provided by the addressing unit can be powered by an
external AS-i power supply.
Operation with the AS-i power supply is possible but cannot be guaranteed for all topologies.
In this event:
Switch offline or switch off the AS-i master.
When operated with the AS-i power supply the addressing unit should be connected close to the
AS-i power supply.
>

All available slaves are displayed in the LC display

The slave to be modified next can be selected using the control panel.
>

The LC display shows the current operating mode

in the upper left-hand corner.

Meaning and function of the individual modes

chapter Operating modes ( page 197)
>

To the right of the operating mode display is the two-digit, seven-segment display.

>

In the right corner the letters 'A' or 'B' indicate whether it is an AS-Interface slave that supports the
AS-i version 2.1. If not, both letters are out.

195

ifm AS-Interface manual tips and tricks for users edition 2.1
Device descriptions

2012-09-26
Device description addressing units

For operating the device there are 5 keys with the following meanings:
Button

Function

pressing once: switch on the device

pressing twice: switch off the unit

search for AS-i slaves connected

activate the next higher address (in the addressing mode only)

read slave information of active slave address (not in the addressing mode)

program the slave address from the active address to the displayed address (in the addressing mode
only)

write the displayed data to the activated slave (not in the addressing mode)

set the operating mode

set the requested address or data (counting upwards)

set the requested address or data (counting downwards)

The function depends on the duration of actuation:

+
simultaneously

196

press briefly:
the unit assigns the address '0' to the connected slave

press for a longer time:

the internal list of the slaves used is deleted

ifm AS-Interface manual tips and tricks for users edition 2.1
Device descriptions

2012-09-26
Device description addressing units

Operating modes
Overview of the operating modes ............................................................................................. 198
Structure of the operating modes.............................................................................................. 199
Addressing mode ...................................................................................................................... 200
Read ID code or ID code 2........................................................................................................ 202
Read and write ID code 1.......................................................................................................... 203
Read IO code ............................................................................................................................ 203
Read and write data .................................................................................................................. 204
Read and write parameters....................................................................................................... 205
Read periphery fault flags ......................................................................................................... 205
11360

WARNING
Serious personal injury and property damage possible!
Changing the variable values in running processes can cause serious personal injury and damage to
equipment in case of malfunctioning or program errors.
Before executing the DATA or PARA functions:
Make sure that no dangerous situations can occur.
If not yet done:
Switch on the addressing unit with the [Read/On] button.
Press the [MODE] button until the requested operating mode is indicated in the LC display.
>

Modes of the connected slaves which are not supported are skipped.
For a slave of version 2.0 for example these are the modes ID1, ID2 and PERI.
For all slaves with address 0 the modes DATA and PARA are skipped since these are not defined
according to the AS-interface specification.

As an alternative you can change directly to the addressing mode:

Press the [MODE] button for > 2 s.
The operating modes allow reading or writing of a wide range of AS-interface data. Some of these
modes are for functional tests only.
In all operating modes, the slave to be read or written must first be activated in the addressing
mode ('ADDR' is displayed).
Use the [MODE] button to set the requested operating mode.

197

ifm AS-Interface manual tips and tricks for users edition 2.1

2012-09-26

Device descriptions

Device description addressing units

Overview of the operating modes

11372

The device supports the following modes:

Display

Operating mode

Note

ADDR

addressing mode

read and write AS-i slave addresses

ID

read ID code

ID1

read and write ID code 1

ID 2

read ID code 2

IO

read IO code

PERI

read periphery fault flag

PARA

display and write parameters

read and write AS-i slave parameters

DATA

read and write data

read and write input or output data of an AS-i slave

The modes are shown in the order in which they are displayed when the [MODE] button is pressed successively.

198

ifm AS-Interface manual tips and tricks for users edition 2.1
Device descriptions

2012-09-26
Device description addressing units

Structure of the operating modes

11373

199

ifm AS-Interface manual tips and tricks for users edition 2.1
Device descriptions

2012-09-26
Device description addressing units

Addressing mode
11362

To readdress, the slave address '0' must be free.

If an AS-interface slave having the address '0' is connected to the device, error message F5 appears.
After switching on the device (via the [Read/On] button):
>

the device is automatically in the addressing mode,

>

the connected participants are displayed.

If another mode was used before:

Press the [MODE] button until 'ADDR' appears in the LC display.
As an alternative you can change directly to the addressing mode:
Press the [MODE] button for > 2 s.
After changing the operating mode:
Press the [Read/On] button to detect the connected participants.
.

Display of detected slaves:

>

If the addressing unit does not detect any slaves, error message F2 appears.

>

All detected slaves are indicated in the lower part of the display (small numbers).
If it is a single slave, neither 'A' nor 'B' are displayed next to the address.
If slaves from version 2.1 onwards are used, an A or B next to the address indicates whether this
is an A or B slave.

>

If several different participants are connected to the addressing unit, the display changes every
2 seconds between single slaves, A slaves and B slaves.

>

The address of the slave which is to be written next (activated slave) flashes at a frequency of
2 Hz.

Press the [Read/On] button again to activate the next higher available address.
For activating a specific slave, set the requested address in the field at the top right using the
buttons [+] or [-].
>

When one of the two buttons is pressed for the first time, 'RD' is no longer displayed.

>

If the requested slave address is displayed, press the [Read/On] button.

>

The activated address is marked by a preceding 'RD'.

The activated address in the field at the bottom flashes at 2 Hz.

200

ifm AS-Interface manual tips and tricks for users edition 2.1
Device descriptions

2012-09-26
Device description addressing units

The following example illustrates this behaviour:

In this example, the addressing unit detected the following slaves:

.

top: slave address 10A and 12A ('10' flashes quickly)

middle: slave address 10B and 11B
bottom: single slaves with the addresses 1, 2 and 3
.

These 3 displays run over the display one after the other.

The activated slave is reprogrammed to the address which is displayed in large text in the upper-right
corner of the display (10A in the example).
Use the [+] button to increment the value or the [-] button to decrement the value.
If the corresponding button is pressed briefly, the display increases or decreases by 1.
If the button is held pressed, the addressing unit increments or decrements continuously.
To address, use the [+] or [-] button to set the new requested address.
>

When one of the two buttons is pressed for the first time, 'RD' preceding the address is no longer
displayed. This indicates that the displayed value is not a value read from a slave.

Use the [Write/Set] button to reprogram the activated slave (small flashing number).
>

Next to the written address 'WR' is displayed. This indicates that a slave has been readdressed.
On the active, flashing address is no longer a slave.

Press the [Read/On] button to update the display and activate the next higher address.

201

ifm AS-Interface manual tips and tricks for users edition 2.1
Device descriptions

2012-09-26
Device description addressing units

Address slaves with IR interface

11364

Using this addressing unit slaves with infrared interface can be addressed.
An IR addressing adapter (E70211) is required for this.

NOTE
The slave must have a watchdog function.
Slaves without a watchdog must be disconnected from the AS-i voltage for a short time after
addressing so that the slaves are detected and activated again by the master.
When the slaves are put into service for the first time (address set at the factory is 0) and a SilverLine
power supply from ifm is used, the shunt must be put into position 2-3 first before the power supply is
switched on.
>

Every action is completed by a slave reset command and thus the connected slave can
communicate with the master again.

For addressing via the IR interface proceed as follows:

Connect the IR adapter to the M12 socket of your addressing unit.
Switch the master offline or disconnect it from the AS-i line.
For the AS-i SilverLine power supplies from ifm the communication can be deactivated by
repositioning the shunt from position 1-2 to position 2-3 on the power supply.
Address the slave in the addressing mode.
Switch the master online again or connect it to the AS-i line.
For the new AS-i power supplies of the ifm SilverLine put the shunt back into position 1-2.

Read ID code or ID code 2

11365

Press (several times) the [MODE] button to select the 'ID' or 'ID 2' mode.
>

The display shows the corresponding ID code of the activated slave.

ID code and ID code 2 can only be read but not written.

The function 'Read ID code 2' is only supported by slaves from AS-i version 2.1 onwards.

202

ifm AS-Interface manual tips and tricks for users edition 2.1
Device descriptions

2012-09-26
Device description addressing units

Read and write ID code 1

11366

This function is only supported by slaves from AS-i version 2.1 onwards.
To write ID code 1, the slave address '0' must be free.
If an AS-interface slave having the address '0' is connected to the device, error message F5 appears.
Press (several times) the [MODE] button to select the 'ID 1' mode.
>

The display shows the corresponding ID code of the activated slave.

>

The activated address is marked by a preceding 'RD'.

The activated address in the field at the bottom flashes at 2 Hz.

Use the [+] or [-] button to set the requested value.

>

When one of the two buttons is pressed for the first time, 'RD' is no longer displayed.

If the requested ID1 code is displayed, the value can be stored non volatilely in the slave by
pressing the [Write/Set] button.
If 'automatic addressing' is used in case of a malfunction, the new slave must have the same ID1 and
ID2 codes as the slave to be exchanged.

Read IO code
11367

Press (several times) the [MODE] button to select the 'IO' mode.
>

The display shows the corresponding IO code of the activated slave.

The IO code can only be read but not written.

203

ifm AS-Interface manual tips and tricks for users edition 2.1
Device descriptions

2012-09-26
Device description addressing units

Read and write data

11368

This operating mode is for test purposes only.

The output data of the higher-level controller can only be read or temporarily be written.

NOTE
In this operating mode the AS-i supply voltage remains switched on after reading or writing the data.
As a result, written output data is retained until the operating mode is changed or the connection
between the addressing unit and the AS-interface slave is interrupted.
This operating mode especially affects the accumulator of the addressing unit.
The addressing unit transmits data as long as the [Write/Set] or [Read/On] button is pressed.
For AS-i products with integrated watchdog:
If no AS-interface message has been received from the slave after a predefined period of time, the
output is switched to the safe (power-free) state. It is thus possible that set outputs are reset when the
[Write/Set] or [Read/On] button is released.
First activate the slave to be read or written.
To switch on the 'Read and Write Data' mode, press the [MODE] button until 'DATA' is displayed.
>

When this mode is switched on, the current input data is read and displayed in the upper-right
corner of the display.

>

In addition, RD is displayed, indicating that the data is read data.

Use the [+] or [-] button to set the requested value.

>

When one of the two buttons is pressed for the first time, 'RD' is no longer displayed.

When the requested value is displayed, transmit it to the slave by holding pressed the [Write/Set]
button.
>

'WR' is displayed.

>

The data is transmitted to the slave until the [Write/Set] button is released.

204

ifm AS-Interface manual tips and tricks for users edition 2.1
Device descriptions

2012-09-26
Device description addressing units

Read and write parameters

11369

This operating mode is for test purposes only.

The parameter values in the AS-i master or AS-i slave can only be read or temporarily projected.

NOTE
In this operating mode the AS-i supply voltage remains switched on after reading or writing the
parameters.
This operating mode especially affects the accumulator of the addressing unit.
First activate the slave to be read or written.
To switch on the 'Display and Write Parameters' mode, press the [MODE] button until 'PARA'
appears in the display.
>

When this mode is switched on, the default parameters are displayed in the upper-right corner.
In this operating mode, the parameter values are not read from the slave.
If the [Read/On] button is pressed again following the write operation to read the parameter
values, this display shows the values last written.

>

In addition, RD is displayed, indicating that the data is read data.

Use the [+] or [-] button to set the requested value.

>

When one of the two buttons is pressed for the first time, 'RD' is no longer displayed.

By holding pressed the [Write/Set] button, the displayed value is transmitted to the slave once.
>

'WR' is displayed.

>

The AS-i slaves use the written parameter values as long as ...
- the activated slave is connected to the addressing unit or
- the operating mode PARA is switched on.

>

If the connection is interrupted or the operating mode is changed, the values are lost.

Due to the order of the modes, pressing the [MODE] button first switches on the 'PARA' operating
mode. Press the [MODE] button again to switch on the 'DATA' operating mode. During this change
the AS-i voltage remains switched on and the parameter value is kept.

Read periphery fault flags

11370

The periphery fault flag is an optional bit which indicates an error in the slave. This function is only
supported by version 2.1 slaves. The addressing unit can read this bit.
Activate the slave from which this bit is to be read.
Press the [MODE] button until 'PERI' is displayed.
>

The display '0' indicates that there is no error.

The display '1' indicates an error.

205

ifm AS-Interface manual tips and tricks for users edition 2.1

2012-09-26

Device descriptions

Device description addressing units

Error messages
11371

The addressing unit supports the following error messages:

Code

Meaning

Description

F1

Overload AS-Interface

Too high current consumption of the slaves connected to the

addressing unit. The handheld programming unit is not able to provide
sufficient supply current.

Connect the AS-i power supply.

F2

Slave not found

No slave found at the active address.

F3

Error during programming

During programming of the address or of the extended ID code 1 the

value could not be permanently stored in the EEPROM of the slave .

F4

Target address assigned

The target address to which the activated slave is to be readdressed is

assigned.

F5

Address 0 assigned

When readdressing a slave or when writing the extended ID code 1,

address '0' must be free. But the address '0' is assigned to a
connected slave.

F6

Standard slave instead of extended slave

found

The operation cannot be executed as the activated slave is not a

version 2.1 slave. The error message always occurs when a standard
slave is activated and you change from the addressing mode to the
mode 'IO', 'PARA' or 'DATA'. These are operating modes which the
standard slave does not support.

F7

Extended slave found instead of standard

slave

The standard slave at the active address was exchanged for a version
2.1 slave. Error code F7 always occurs when you attempt to set a
version 2.1 slave to an address when neither the extension A nor B is
shown in the display.

F8

Reception error

Due to an error the response of the slave could not be received

correctly.

206

ifm AS-Interface manual tips and tricks for users edition 2.1
AS-i system check

2012-09-26
Troubleshooting ControllerE and gateways (AC13nn)

AS-i system check

Troubleshooting ControllerE and gateways (AC13nn).............................................................. 207
Fault analysis via the controller (AC13nn) ................................................................................ 225
Error analysis via the gateway (AC14nn).................................................................................. 238
Fault analysis via the analyser .................................................................................................. 242
Earth fault / insulation fault monitoring ...................................................................................... 251
Symmetry measurement ........................................................................................................... 255
6705

5.1

Troubleshooting ControllerE and gateways

(AC13nn)
Boot errors error codes B00...B11 ......................................................................................... 208
AS-i system errors error codes E10...E32 ............................................................................. 209
AS-i master command errors error codes M01...M44............................................................ 212
RTS errors error codes R01...R43 ......................................................................................... 216
List of errors .............................................................................................................................. 222
How does the device react in case of a fault? .......................................................................... 224
6706

In this chapter we will present a couple of error messages, their possible causes and how to remove
the faults.
For further error messages of the device and detailed information device manual:
www.ifm.com > select your country > [data sheet search] > (article no.) > [Additional data]

207

ifm AS-Interface manual tips and tricks for users edition 2.1

2012-09-26

AS-i system check

5.1.1

Troubleshooting ControllerE and gateways (AC13nn)

Boot errors error codes B00...B11

6020

Menu operation interrupted.

Error message superposes the menu screen.

Error message only disappears after the following actions:

1. Error removed AND
2. Error message acknowledged with the right function key.

Error message

Cause(s)

B00

ControllerE boot error

After power-on of the device, an error was found
during initialisation of the individual device
components.

Remedy

Check the further error messages.

Possible causes:

Ground the device via the rail.

Unacceptable interference on the 24 V

power supply.

Connect the FE terminal to the machine

ground.

Unacceptable interference on the AS-i power

supply.

Unacceptably high electrostatic charges and

electromagnetic fields in close proximity of
the device.

For further details please refer to the following

error messages.
B01

Master 1 initialisation
Unsuccessful initialisation of the master.

B02

Master 2 initialisation

B03

General FAT error

An error was found in the data field of the "File
Allocation Table" FAT.

B04

Use a switched-mode power supply to supply

the device with power.

B01

Check the further error messages.

Replace the device and project again.

Only one master detected

The operating system can only detect 1 master in
the device although 2 masters should be present.
Possible cause:
Hardware fault.

B05

Two masters detected

The operating system can detect 2 masters in the
device although communication with only
1 master is allowed.

B04

Possible cause:
Hardware fault.
B06

Fieldbus type not detected

During automatic detection of the integrated
fieldbus no enabled fieldbus module could be
detected.

B04

Possible cause:
Hardware fault.
B07

Number of masters not correct

Invalid information was received when querying
the versions of the masters.
Possible cause:
Hardware fault.

208

B04

ifm AS-Interface manual tips and tricks for users edition 2.1

2012-09-26

AS-i system check

Troubleshooting ControllerE and gateways (AC13nn)

Error message

Cause(s)

Remedy

B08

Exec. of PLC blocked by user

(for gateway: reserved)

When the device was started the automatic start

or:
of the PLC program was disabled by the user. The
left function key of the device was pressed during
power-on.
B09

reserved

B10

Master 1 firmware obsolete

The AS-i master firmware does not contain
functions required for the RTS operating system.

B11

Master 2 firmware obsolete

5.1.2

Release function key during power-on.

No action because this is requested.

Update the AS-i master firmware to the

required minimum version.

B10

AS-i system errors error codes E10...E32

6024

Menu operation interrupted.

Error message superposes the menu screen.

Error message only disappears after the following actions:

1. Error removed AND
2. Error message acknowledged with the right function key.

Error message

Cause(s)

E10

Slave not activated

The slave was detected in the system but not
activated by the master.
Detected slave profile does not correspond to the
projected slave profile and the master is in the
"protected mode".

E11

E12

Remedy

Check the slave profile:

[Menu] > [Slave Info]

Connect the slave with the right profile.

Reproject the slaves:

[Menu] > [Quick Setup]

Slave not present

Slave present in the "List of projected slaves" LPS

but not detected on the AS-i master.

Slave not projected
The slave was detected on the AS-i bus but is
missing in the "List of projected slaves" LPS.

Check the slave connections.

Connect the slave again.
Reproject the slaves:
[Menu] > [Quick Setup]

E13

Periphery fault detected

E14

Safety slave alert

Error message not active at present.

E15

Analogue protocol error

Error message not active at present.

E20

AS-i voltage error

Display of the list of slaves with periphery fault (LPF)

Periphery fault detected on at least one connected
Display of slave with periphery fault
slave.

The master is in the "Protected mode" and detects

that the AS-i voltage supply is not greater than

28 V.

Check the AS-i voltage supply on the master

and replace if necessary

The message is only generated if at least one

slave is projected.
E21

No slave detected
The master is in the "Protected mode" and detects
that no slave is connected to the AS-i bus.

The message is only generated if at least one

slave is projected.

Check the slave connections.

Check the AS-i line.

209

ifm AS-Interface manual tips and tricks for users edition 2.1

2012-09-26

AS-i system check

Troubleshooting ControllerE and gateways (AC13nn)

Error message

Cause(s)

E22

Slave 0 detected

Remedy

The master is in the "Protected mode" and detects

a slave with the address 0 on the AS-i bus.

This message is only generated if the profile of
the missing slave on the AS-i bus is identical to
the profile of the slave with the address 0.
E23

Slave 0 has wrong profile

The master is in the "Protected mode" and detects
a slave with the address 0 on the AS-i bus.

This message is only generated if the profile of

the missing slave on the AS-i bus is not identical
with that of the slave with the address 0.

E24

Switch the master to the operating mode

"Projection mode":
Set operating mode ( page 59)

Check and replace the slave.

Reproject the slaves:
[Menu] > [Quick Setup]

Autoaddress not enabled

The master is in the "Protected mode" and detects
a slave with the address 0 on the AS-i bus.
This message is only generated if the profile of
the missing slave on the AS-i bus is identical with
the profile of the slave with the address 0 and the
"Automatic Addressing" in the master has not
been activated.

E25

Activate "Automatic addressing" in the master

Check the detected and projected slave

profile in the menu [Slave Info].

Check the entries of slaves in the lists LAS,

LDS, LPS, LPF in the menu [Slave Lists].

Projection error
The master is in the "Normal Operating Mode"
and detects a projection error.
Possible causes:

E26

The profiles of the detected slaves are not

identical with the projected slaves.

One or more slaves are additionally detected

on the AS-i bus.

One or several slaves are missing on the

AS-i bus.

General periphery fault

Display of the list of slaves with periphery fault (LPF)
The master is in the "Normal operating mode" and
detects that at least one slave on the AS-i bus
Display of slave with periphery fault
signals a periphery fault.

E27

Normal mode not active

The master reports that it is not in the "Normal
Operating Mode".
Possible causes:
1.

The master detects an AS-i voltage lower

than 22 V and therefore changes into the
"Offline Mode".

2.

The master has received a request from the

operating system to change into the "Offline
Mode".

3.

The master has detected a transfer error in

the communication with the operating
system.

1.

Switch the PLC off and on again

If this does not help: Replace the device and

project again.

Other causes which can lead to the error

message directly after the device has been
switched on:
4.

210

Initialisation of the master after switching on

the device was not successful.

Check the AS-i voltage supply on the master

and replace if necessary

3.

ifm AS-Interface manual tips and tricks for users edition 2.1

2012-09-26

AS-i system check

Error message

Troubleshooting ControllerE and gateways (AC13nn)

Cause(s)

Remedy

5.

Wait.

If too long: 4.

6.
E28

The master has not yet received the

projection nor the projected parameters
from the operating system.
The master has not yet been started by the
operating system.

5.

Status command channel

The command channel has detected an invalid
status.

Check the request of command channel

(1st word).

Unknown MUX field identifier

(for gateway: reserved)

Check the data accesses via pointers into

area < 4000h of your PLC program.

The transmission between AS-I master and PLC

processor has been deranged.

Check the electrical environment for

unacceptably high electro-magnetic fields and
static charging.

Check the grounding of the device: FE

terminal and rail must be connected to the
machine ground!

Possible causes:
Overwriting of the command channel by Profibus
DPV1.
Profibus DP module 12, word 1.
E29

E30

Safe slave triggered (1)

For the indicated AS-i slave the opening of the
contacts of the first safety circuit is detected.

E31

Safe slave triggered (2)

For the indicated AS-i slave the opening of the
contacts of the second safety circuit is detected.

E32

no error
status information of the runtime system

no error
status information of the runtime system

Safe slave triggered (1/2)

Master has detected a "safe slave" on the AS-i

line, whose inputs are constantly switched to LOW

for a period > 64 ms.

Bring the slave into the safe state.

211

ifm AS-Interface manual tips and tricks for users edition 2.1

2012-09-26

AS-i system check

5.1.3

Troubleshooting ControllerE and gateways (AC13nn)

AS-i master command errors error codes M01...M44

6032

Menu operation interrupted.

Error message superposes the menu screen.

Error message only disappears after the following actions:

1. Error removed AND
2. Error message acknowledged with the right function key.

Error message

Cause(s)

Remedy

M01

Command execution error

Check the further error messages.

Slave not found

Check the slave connections.

It was tried to access a slave which is not on the

AS-i bus by means of an AS-i command. The
slave is not in the LDS.

Connect the slave again.

Slave 0 found

Remove slave with the address 0 or address

it correctly.

Slave with same address found

During the execution of a command the master

detects that there is already a slave at the
requested address on the AS-i bus.

Remove one of the slaves with double

address.

Readdress the remaining slave.

Reactivate the removed slave.

Replace slave.

Repeat the command.

An error has occurred during the execution of an

AS-i command which has stopped the execution of
the command.
For further details please refer to the following
error messages.
M02

M03

The master detects a slave with the address 0 on

the AS-i bus and can therefore not execute the
command.
Example: The address of a slave is to be changed
while a slave with the address 0 is present on the
AS-i bus.
M04

Example: The address of a slave is to be changed

to an address which is already assigned to another
slave on the AS-i bus.
M05

Delete the old slave address

The attempt to reprogram a slave to the address 0
fails.
Example: AS-i slave has a limited number of
possibilities to change the address, these are now
exhausted.

M06

Reading "Extended ID Code 1"

The master receives no or no valid response when
reading the "Extended ID code 1".
Example: Attempt to readdress an A/B slave to
another address.

M07

212

Writing to slave failed:

1.

The attempt of the master to readdress a

slave to the new target address fails.

Repeat the command.

2.

Writing the "Extended ID Code 1" on slave 1

fails.
Example: Attempt to readdress an A/B slave
to another address.

Repeat the command.

ifm AS-Interface manual tips and tricks for users edition 2.1

2012-09-26

AS-i system check

Troubleshooting ControllerE and gateways (AC13nn)

Error message

Cause(s)

M08

New address only stored temporarily

Remedy

During the readdressing of a slave the new

address could not be written to the slave because
the slave is no longer detected on the AS-i bus.
Possible causes:

M09

1.

Double addressing.

M04

2.

Major bus interference.

Extended ID1 temporarily stored

Remove the cause of the interference.

M08

While writing the "ID Code 1" to the slave the code
could not be written to the slave because the slave
is no longer detected on the AS-i bus.
Possible causes:

M10

Double addressing.

Major bus interference.

Slave not in LAS

Switch the master to the operating mode

"Projection mode":
Set operating mode ( page 59)

Check and replace slave.

Reproject the slaves:

[Menu] > [Quick Setup]

The master detects that a slave has not been

activated.
Possible causes:
The slave profile in the projection data is not
identical with the profile of the detected slave and
the master is in the "Protected Mode".
M11

Slave data invalid

This error message has a multiple meaning and
thus depends on the requested command:
1.

2.

M12

Readdressing of the slave

Address 32 = 0B was indicated as target
address.

Address 0B is not valid.

Indicate valid address.

Write parameters
The attempt has been made to write a value
greater than 7hex to an A/B slave, ID=Ahex.

Indicate valid value.

Sequence failure
During the transfer according to the "7.4 slave
protocol" the master detected an error in the triple
sequence of the slave.
Possible causes:

M13

1.

Interference on the bus.

Remove the cause of the interference.

2.

Software error in the AS-i slave.

Contact AS-i specialist or manufacturer.

Shorten cycle by optimising the PLC

program.

Avoid program loops and complex arithmetic

operations.

Timeout during sequence transmission

(for gateway: reserved)
During the transfer to the "7.4 Slave protocol" the
master detected a timeout in the communication
with the operating system.
Possible cause:

Long PLC cycle which slows down the

transfer of the individual 7.4 segments from
the operating system or PLC to the master to
an unacceptable degree: t > 1 sec.

If this case occurs, the master will end the

7.4 transfer started last and will again enter
into normal data exchange with the
respective slave.

213

ifm AS-Interface manual tips and tricks for users edition 2.1

2012-09-26

AS-i system check

Troubleshooting ControllerE and gateways (AC13nn)

Error message

Cause(s)

M14

Invalid address

Remedy

This error message has a multiple meaning and

thus depends on the requested command:

M15

1.

The attempt was made to write a parameter

to slave 0.

Correct the slave address to a value of

1...31dec.

2.

During readdressing the address 0 or 0B

was indicated as start and target address.

Indicate valid address.

3.

During the attempt to write the "Extended ID

code 1" the address 0 was used.

Indicate valid address.

Slave interrupted 7.4 transfer

The addressed 7.4 slave has stopped the transfer.
Possible cause:
Error in the 7.4 data of the PLC.
Possible causes:

M16

1.

Interference on the bus.

Remove the cause of the interference.

2.

Software error in the AS-i slave.

Contact slave manufacturer.

Remove the cause of the interference.

The attempt was made to start a new 7.4 transfer

during an active 7.4 protocol transfer.

Repeat the command.

7.4 host sequence failure

Correct value "Dlen".

The sequence bit was set to 1 by the host or the

PLC although a value < 30dec was indicated in the
"Dlen" data field.

or:

Change sequence bit.

Invalid 7.4 data length

Correct value "Dlen".

The indicated data length "Dlen" is not a multiple

of the factor 3.

A 7.4 protocol transfer always consists of several

data triples.

Invalid command

Check the cause for the wrong command

and correct.

Check the cause for the wrong command

and correct.

Slave deleted during active transfer

During an active 7.4 protocol transfre the slave
was deleted from the list of active slaves by the
master.
Possible cause:
Interference on the bus.

M17

M18

M19

M20

7.4 transfer active

Master received an unknown command.

M21

Safety monitor protocol error

During the processing of the safety monitor
protocol a transmission error occurred.
Possible cause:
Interference on the bus.

M22

M23

Timeout command

The execution of the master command exceeded

the permissible execution time. The command was
cancelled.

Remove the cause of the interference.

Details command description

Command requirements not met

Correction of parameters which are

necessary for the execution of the AS-i
master command!
Details command description

The necessary conditions for the execution of the

master command to be executed are not met.
M24M32

214

reserved

ifm AS-Interface manual tips and tricks for users edition 2.1

2012-09-26

AS-i system check

Troubleshooting ControllerE and gateways (AC13nn)

Error message

Cause(s)

Remedy

M33

Internal safety protocol error

Error when processing the safety monitor protocol

on the AS-i line, phase "Init A".

Improve the transmission quality on the AS-i

line.

To do so, monitor the telegram error counter.

If the counter values change:

M34

Modify the laying of the AS-i line so that no

more telegram errors occur.

M33

Timeout on Safety Protocol

Timeout when processing the safety monitor
protocol on the AS-i line.

M36

Check AS-i line for earth fault using earth

fault monitor.

Internal safety protocol error

Error when processing the safety monitor protocol
on the AS-i line, phase "Init B".

M35

M33

SubCmd invalid

Only use permitted sub-commands.

Correct the slave address to the address of a

slave with the profile S-7.F.

Correct the slave address to a value of

1...31dec.

LPM already full

The LPM list is already full so that no other entries

can be added.

Delete a superfluous slave that already is in

the LPM.

Check distribution of the slaves to the AS-i

masters and modify, if necessary.

M40

Slave address already given in the LPM

Delete wrong slave from the LPM.

M41

Slave-Adresse in der LPM unbekannt

Slave in der LPM speichern.

M42

Monitor protocol changed

Retrieve the last received data once again.

Check PLC command channel for cyclical

use.

Interrupt cyclical use.

Project AS-i master again.

The sub-command entry of the command

_PCS_SAFETY_MONITOR is invalid.
M37

Slave address has no profile S-7.F.F

The slave to be added to the list "LPM" (list of
projected (safety) monitors) does not have the
allowed profile in the CDI data.

M38

Slave address outside range 1...31

The slave to be added to the list "LPM" does not
have the allowed address.

M39

The safety monitor protocol was interrupted during

processing. The last received data are probably
not consistent.
M43

HostCmd loop timeout

Processing of the command
"_PCS_SAFETY_MONITOR" could not be started
within the permitted time.

M44

Internal safety protocol error

During processing of the protocol of the safety
monitor an error occurred in the internal "AS-i
master state machine".

215

ifm AS-Interface manual tips and tricks for users edition 2.1

2012-09-26

AS-i system check

5.1.4

Troubleshooting ControllerE and gateways (AC13nn)

RTS errors error codes R01...R43

6040

RTS = Runtime System (= operating system of the device)

Menu operation interrupted.

Error message superposes the menu screen.

Error message only disappears after the following actions:

1. Error removed AND
2. Error message acknowledged with the right function key.

Error message

Cause(s)

R01

Unknown RTS operating mode

The operating system does not recognise the set
operating mode of the device ("RUN" / "STOP" /
"GATEWAY").

Remedy

Switch the device off and keep the left

function key pressed during the switch-on
operation.

Check the cause for the wrong command and

correct.

Reinstall the operating system.

Ground the device via the rail.

Connect the FE terminal to the machine

ground.

Use a switched-mode power supply to supply

the device with power.

Repeat the command.

Possible cause:
Modification of the device from a gateway variant
into a device with PLC support.
R02

Master 1 MUX field error

During the transfer of the MUX fields from the
operating system the master detected an invalid
field number.
Possible causes:
1.

2.

Parts of the operating system have been

overwritten by the PLC.

Unacceptable interference on the 24 V

power supply.

R03

Master 2 MUX field error

R04

Master 1 protocol error (EDET)

R02

The master has detected a protocol error during

the transfer of the data fields.

R02

R05

Master 2 protocol error (EDET)

R02

R06

General RTS program failure

The operating system has detected an invalid
status in the process while executing the program

internally.

Reinstall the operating system.

Possible cause:
Operating system software error.
R07

Projection mode not active

Switch the master to the operating mode

"Projection mode":
Set operating mode ( page 59)

Load the PLC program to the ControllerE

It was tried to execute an AS-i command which is

only permitted in the projection mode.
R08

No PLC program loaded

(for gateway: reserved)
The attempt was made to start a PLC program
although no program had been loaded to the
ControllerE.

216

ifm AS-Interface manual tips and tricks for users edition 2.1

2012-09-26

AS-i system check

Troubleshooting ControllerE and gateways (AC13nn)

Error message

Cause(s)

R09

RS-232 recognition baud rate

(for gateway: reserved)

Remedy

The hardware of the integrated serial interface

chip has found a transfer error in the RS-232
data flow.
Possible causes:

R10

1.

Baud rate setting in the device different

from the setting in the PC.

Adapt the baud rate

2.

Other programs (e.g. messenger) send via

the RS-232 interface of the PC.

Exit other programs on the PC.

RS-232 buffer overflow

A buffer overflow was found in the serial receive
buffer of the RS-232 interface.
Possible causes:

R11

1.

RS-232 telegram too long or baud rate too

high.

Check the driver or reduce baud rate.

2.

Faulty connection cable between PC and

RS-232 connection on the device.

Replace the connection cable.

Reduce interference on the RS-232 cable by

means of the following measures:
- Screen cable,
- Reduce cable length,
- Remove interfering source.

Remove the error in the protocol driver.

RS-232 parity check

The parity check of the serial data flow of the RS232 interface was unsuccessful.
Possible cause:
Electromagnetic interference.

R12

ASC0 handler switched

The decoding of the serial data flow was
changed.
Possible cause:
Command for switching the device to the test
mode / normal operating mode during serial data
flow.

R13

R14

Permanently stabilise the 24 V supply voltage

24 V voltage unstable
above 20 V.
During normal operation voltage drops below 1 V
Better:
were found on the 24 V power supply cable.

Use a switched-mode power supply to supply

the device with power.

24 V voltage error restart

Acknowledge the message.

The voltage failure of the 24 V power supply

caused the device to start again.

The device resumes the normal operating

mode.

In future: Use a switched-mode power supply

to supply the device with power.

217

ifm AS-Interface manual tips and tricks for users edition 2.1

2012-09-26

AS-i system check

Troubleshooting ControllerE and gateways (AC13nn)

Error message

Cause(s)

R15

C165 Watchdog Timeout

Remedy

The main processor has detected a timeout.

Possible causes:
1.

2.

R16

Unacceptable interference on the AS-i

power supply.

Connect the FE terminal to the machine

ground.

Use a switched-mode power supply to supply

the device with power.

1.

3.

Hardware error.

Replace the device and project again.

4.

Operating system software error.

Reinstall the operating system.

Find the reason, maybe also further error

messages.

Software restart

Device waits for 24 V

(for AC1375: reserved)
After power-on of the device an unacceptably low
24 V power supply of < 18 V was detected.

R18

Ground the device via the rail.

Unacceptably high electrostatic charges

and electromagnetic fields in close
proximity of the device.

The main processor has detected a restart of the

device which was not caused by a voltage failure.
R17

R14

Master 1: Host WDT error

The AS-i master signals a timeout during the
communication with the fieldbus master (host).
During the continuous communication of the
master with the operating system the master has
detected a timeout.
Possible causes:
1.

Voltage drops on the 24 V power supply

cable.

Use a switched-mode power supply to supply

the device with power.

2.

Operating system software error.

Reinstall the operating system.

R19

Master 2: Host WDT error

R20

Profibus DP configuration

R18

The configuration of the Profibus master for the

device is not valid.
Possible causes:

Check the received data lengths in the menu

[Fieldbus Setup].

Install a valid operating system.

Module lengths incorrect.

Number of modules incorrect.
Sum of the data lengths across all modules too
large.
R21

No ifm Profibus DP interface present

A Profibus DP card is expected in the device,
however, it has not been detected.
Possible cause:
Wrong operating system in the device:
e.g.: AC1325 operating system software in an
AC1311.

218

ifm AS-Interface manual tips and tricks for users edition 2.1

2012-09-26

AS-i system check

Error message
R22

Troubleshooting ControllerE and gateways (AC13nn)

Cause(s)

Remedy

DP parameter invalid
The parameter setting of the Profibus master for
the device is not valid.
Possible causes:

Adopt the parameter field from the GSD file

and modify it according to the specification.

Disconnect from the Profibus master.

Reestablish the connection to the Profibus

master.

Download the current / projected parameters

of the AS-i slaves via the Profibus.

Structure of the parameter field incorrect.

Length of the parameter field incorrect.
Coding of the different parameters does not
correspond to the specification.
R23

DP parameter download
The attempt to download the current / projected
parameters of the AS-i slaves via the Profibus
was unsuccessful.
Possible causes:
The slave to which the parameter was to be
written was deleted from the list of detected
slaves.
A timeout was found during the execution of the
AS-i command "Write Parameter".

R24

Missing pos. CPTE edge

During communication with the master a change
in the state of the control signal was not detected.

Reinstall the operating system.

Possible cause:
Operating system software error.
R25

Master 1: Abnormal condition

The master reports that it is not in the "Normal
Operating Mode".
Possible causes:
1.

The master detects an AS-i voltage smaller

than 22 V and therefore changes into the

"Offline Mode".

Use a switched-mode power supply to supply

the device with power.

2.

The master has received a request from

the operating system to change into the
"Offline Mode".

Check the cause for the wrong command and

correct.

3.

The master has detected a transfer error in

the communication with the operating
system.

R15

With the AS-i power supply connected the

master detects that no slave is connected
to the AS-i bus.

4.

Check and correct the wiring on the AS-i bus.

Other causes which can lead to the error

message directly after the device has been
switched on:
5.

Initialisation of the master during power on

of the device was not successful.

Boot errors error codes B00...B11 ( page 208) >

error message B01

6.

The master has not yet received the

projection nor the projected parameters
from the operating system.

5.

The master has not yet been started by the

operating system.

5.

7.
R26

Master 2: Abnormal condition

R25

219

ifm AS-Interface manual tips and tricks for users edition 2.1

2012-09-26

AS-i system check

Troubleshooting ControllerE and gateways (AC13nn)

Error message

Cause(s)

R27

Profibus PLC access violation

(for gateway: reserved)
The PLC has tried to access the protected
address range of the Profibus DP ASIC.

Remedy

Remove functions from the PLC project which

make use of an Anybus card.

Possible cause:
A PLC project was loaded with the support of an
Anybus fieldbus card.
R28

Password protected
A functionality of the device was requested which
is not allowed with the currently active password.

R29

PC command unknown
An unknown command was received In the "Test
Mode" operating mode of the device.

R30

Check the cause for the wrong command and

correct.

Configure the data flow according to the

specification.

PC checksum error
An invalid checksum was detected in the "Test
Mode" operating mode in the data flow of the
device.

R31

Set a higher password level

Menu not available

The selected menu could not be displayed.
Possible causes:

R32

1.

Required hardware is not available in the

device.

Check the device by means of data sheet.

2.

Required hardware was not detected by

the RTS operating system.

Switch the device off and on again.

RTS checksum error

The checksum of the runtime system does not
correspond to the stored checksum.
Possible causes:
1.

Faulty flash memory.

Replace the faulty device.

2.

Strong ESD fields in case of unacceptable

grounding of the device.

Minimise the ESD fields.

Correct the grounding of the device.

R33

reserved

R34

Error in font data

The data of the character set is not correct.

Possible causes:

R35

No data is available in the areas where font

data is expected.

The expected formatting is not correct.

Reprogram the firmware or send the device to

the after-sales service.

Error in menu text

Possible causes:

R36

No data is available in the areas where

menu text is expected.

The expected formatting is not correct.

Error in user language

Text of the user language is incorrect.

R37

Error in text format

The indicated text format is incorrect.

R38

220

reserved

R34

R34

R34

ifm AS-Interface manual tips and tricks for users edition 2.1

2012-09-26

AS-i system check

Error message

Troubleshooting ControllerE and gateways (AC13nn)

Cause(s)

Remedy

R39

reserved

R40

Const. data checksum error

A checksum error occurred in the const. areas

(character sets, system language, user language)
of the runtime system.

Reprogram the firmware or send the device to

the after-sales service.

R41

reserved

R42

reserved

R43

reserved

R44

Invalid AS-i command

Correct the command number to a valid value.

R45

DP module 12 illegal word access

Check and correct the defined data lengths of

the modules 1...11 in the GSD file.

Reprogram the firmware or send the device to

the after-sales service.

When configuring the Profibus DP modules, an

invalid value (odd address) was detected for the
memory to be transmitted.
R46

Internal DP stack error

A fatal error was detected in the Profibus DP
stack.

221

ifm AS-Interface manual tips and tricks for users edition 2.1
AS-i system check

5.1.5

2012-09-26
Troubleshooting ControllerE and gateways (AC13nn)

List of errors
6044

Incorrect behaviour

Cause(s)

Remedy

Switch off the device.

Press the left function key and keep

it pressed.

Switch on the device again.

>

The display can be read again.

error in the contents of the PLC memory,

e.g.: program error in the boot project
>

Release the function key.

Start of the boot project is disabled.

>

The PLC is in the operating mode

"STOP".

Device does not display the start screen

after power-on:

Check the PLC program in the PC

and correct.

>

Text/graphics display blank or not

readable.

Store the PLC program in the device

and create it as boot project.

>

LEDs light / flash mazily.

The voltage supply does not correspond

to the AS-i rule?

Correct it.

The grounding is not according to

specifications?
electromagnetic incompatibility

Correct it.

Strong interference by neighbouring

machines?

The text/graphics display indicates

nothing any more (only background
illumination active).
All other functions of the device are not
affected.

If possible: Change the location.

Correct or screen the interfering

machines.

Press [ ] and [ ] simultaneously for

about 2 seconds.

>

The text/graphics display is

reinitialised.

>

The language selection is active.

Quit the language selection with

[ESC].

Remove the last slave with the

address 0 from the bus.

Program the old slave with the

address 0 to the intended address
Change addresses of individual AS-i
slaves ( page 65).

Reactivate the previously removed

slave.

Reconfigure the device

system errors

The LDS slave list does not show any

there is at least one other slave with the
slave with the address 0 although such a
address 0 connected to the master
slave has just been connected.

222

ifm AS-Interface manual tips and tricks for users edition 2.1
AS-i system check
Incorrect behaviour

2012-09-26
Troubleshooting ControllerE and gateways (AC13nn)

Cause(s)

Remedy

a) slave replacement:

>

The red LED on the slave is lit:

the slave was not correctly
addressed.

>

Error message on the master: "slave

not present".

>

The red LED on the slave lights

when the address is already
occupied: the slave was not
correctly addressed.

>

For all readdressed and connected

slaves the red LEDs light:
the slaves were not correctly
addressed

Reconfigure the device

>

In case of slaves with different

profiles:
the red LED on the slave is lit:
the slave was not correctly
addressed.

>

In case of slaves with the same

profile:
At first everything is ok, until you
have different input signals. Then,
the message "configuration error" is
displayed.

Leave the menu item with [ESC]

(= right button).

Check and correct the PLC

program.

Slave was replaced.

The new slave did not have the

address "0" before.

b) set-up: Master in the projection mode

New slave addressed using

handheld addressing unit and then
connected.

2 identical slaves with the same address

on the AS-i master.

c) set-up: Master not in the projection

mode

When changing the address of A/B

slaves the device sometimes freezes in
the "Wait" display.
The device does not react to the button
being pressed or only with a long delay.
> Error messages R02...R05.

system errors
The cycle time of the PLC is > 300 ms.
Other processes in the device have
priority.

223

ifm AS-Interface manual tips and tricks for users edition 2.1

2012-09-26

AS-i system check

5.1.6

Troubleshooting ControllerE and gateways (AC13nn)

How does the device react in case of a fault?

6045

Faults displayed during operation

Reaction

The slave is disconnected from the AS-i bus.

Slave without watchdog:

Output signals remain unchanged.
Slave with watchdog:
Outputs switched off.
AS-i master as PLC:
Evaluate the slave failure in the PLC program. If necessary:
Stop the machine/plant.

The AS-i master is disconnected from the fieldbus.

AS-i master as gateway:

Outputs switched off.
AS-i master as PLC:
Input signals from the fieldbus master are reset.
PLC triggers AS-i outputs with "0".
Evaluate the fieldbus failure in the PLC program. If
necessary: Stop the machine/plant.

The device fails as fieldbus slave.

224

Effect Description of the fieldbus master (host).

ifm AS-Interface manual tips and tricks for users edition 2.1
AS-i system check

5.2

2012-09-26
Fault analysis via the controller (AC13nn)

Fault analysis via the controller (AC13nn)

Number of AS-i voltage failures on the AS-i master ................................................................. 225
Number of configuration errors on the master .......................................................................... 227
AS-i telegram errors on the master ........................................................................................... 230
Number of disturbed telegrams on the master (by noisy slaves).............................................. 233
Reset error counter ................................................................................................................... 236
6707

5.2.1

Number of AS-i voltage failures on the AS-i master

5956

How often was an inadmissible decrease or interruption of the voltage supply of the AS-i bus
responsible for system failures? The device displays:
Here you cannot see in detail when which error occurred.
chapter Troubleshooting ControllerE and gateways (AC13nn) ( page 207).
The error counter is reset...
- when the device is switched off and on again,
- with the function Reset error counter ( page 236).
[MENU] > [Diagnostics] > Select master > [Voltage Disturb.]

Step 1:
Press [Menu].

MENU

USER

Quick Setup

Step 2:

PLC Setup

Press [ ] to scroll to [Diagnostics].

Slave Lists
OK

ESC

225

ifm AS-Interface manual tips and tricks for users edition 2.1
AS-i system check

2012-09-26
Fault analysis via the controller (AC13nn)

Slave Lists

Step 3:

Address Slave

Select [Diagnostics] with [OK].

Diagnostics
OK

ESC

Diagnostics of

Step 4:

AS-i Master 1

AC1375: Menu screen not available.

Safety Master 1

If necessary, press [ ] to scroll to another master.

OK

130

ESC

Slave List of

Step 5:

AS-i Master 1

AC1375: Menu screen not available.

Safety Master 1

Select AS-i master with [OK].

OK

130

ESC

AS-i 1 diagnost.

Step 6:

Voltage Disturb.

AC1375: Menu screen number = 72

Config. Error

Select [Voltage Disturb.] with [OK].

OK

131

ESC

AS-i 1

Step 7:

Power Fail Ctr.

>

2
133

AC1375: Menu screen number = 74

ESC

Display of the number of failures of the AS-i supply on the master.

(Reset error counter ( page 236))

Press [ESC] to return to the start screen.

226

ifm AS-Interface manual tips and tricks for users edition 2.1
AS-i system check

2012-09-26
Fault analysis via the controller (AC13nn)

Fault analysis voltage failures

6711

Possible reasons for voltage failures:

switch-on of big loads

mains fluctuation

voltage dips

5.2.2

Number of configuration errors on the master

5958

Display of the number of configuration errors on the master.

Here you cannot see in detail when which error occurred.
chapter Troubleshooting ControllerE and gateways (AC13nn) ( page 207).
The error counter is reset...
- when the device is switched off and on again,
- with the function Reset error counter ( page 236).
[MENU] > [Diagnostics] > Select master > [Config. Error]

Step 1:
Press [Menu].

MENU

USER

Quick Setup

Step 2:

PLC Setup

Press [ ] to scroll to [Diagnostics].

Slave Lists
OK

ESC

227

ifm AS-Interface manual tips and tricks for users edition 2.1
AS-i system check

2012-09-26
Fault analysis via the controller (AC13nn)

Slave Lists

Step 3:

Address Slave

Select [Diagnostics] with [OK].

Diagnostics
OK

ESC

Diagnostics of

Step 4:

AS-i Master 1

AC1375: Menu screen not available.

Safety Master 1

If necessary, press [ ] to scroll to another master.

OK

130

ESC

Slave List of

Step 5:

AS-i Master 1

AC1375: Menu screen not available.

Safety Master 1

Select AS-i master with [OK].

OK

130

ESC

AS-i 1 diagnost.

Step 6:

Voltage Disturb.

AC1375: Menu screen number = 72

Config. Error

Press [ ] to select [Config. Error].

OK

131

ESC

AS-i 1 diagnost.

Step 7:

Voltage Disturb.

AC1375: Menu screen number = 72

Config. Error

Select [Config. Error] with [OK].

OK

228

131

ESC

ifm AS-Interface manual tips and tricks for users edition 2.1
AS-i system check

Fault analysis via the controller (AC13nn)

AS-i Master 1
Config Error Count.

Step 8:
AC1375: Menu screen number = 28

>

24
50

2012-09-26

ESC

Display of the number of configuration errors on the master.

(Reset error counter ( page 236))

Press [ESC] to return to the start screen.

Fault analysis configuration errors

6712

A configuration error is given if a slave does not reply in 3 successive AS-i cycles (6 telegram
repetitions = burst errors class 6).
Possible reasons for configuration errors:

faulty slave

slave with the address 0 in the AS-i network

too long cable

EMC problems, caused e.g. by electrostatic discharge, high frequency interference, etc.

229

ifm AS-Interface manual tips and tricks for users edition 2.1
AS-i system check

5.2.3

2012-09-26
Fault analysis via the controller (AC13nn)

AS-i telegram errors on the master

5960

We talk of a telegram error if the expected response telegram from a slave is not received within a
defined time or the signal sequences in the response telegram cannot be interpreted by the AS-i
master. Examples:

Due to an electrical fault the AS-i cable is used asymmetrically (one-sided earth fault). The AS-i
signal is no longer clearly recognisable.

The electrical AS-i connection to an AS-i slave is not OK.

The electrical environment of the AS-i system (EMC) interferes with the AS-i telegrams.

Here you cannot see in detail when which error occurred.

chapter Troubleshooting ControllerE and gateways (AC13nn) ( page 207).
The error counter is reset...
- when the device is switched off and on again,
- with the function Reset error counter ( page 236).
[MENU] > [Diagnostics] > Select master > [Telegr. Error]

Step 1:
Press [Menu].

MENU

USER

Quick Setup

Step 2:

PLC Setup

Press [ ] to scroll to [Diagnostics].

Slave Lists
OK

ESC

Slave Lists

Step 3:

Address Slave

Select [Diagnostics] with [OK].

Diagnostics
OK

230

ESC

ifm AS-Interface manual tips and tricks for users edition 2.1
AS-i system check

2012-09-26
Fault analysis via the controller (AC13nn)

Diagnostics of

Step 4:

AS-i master 1

AC1375: Menu screen not available.

Safety Master 1

If necessary, press [ ] to scroll to another master.

130

OK

ESC

Slave List of

Step 5:

AS-i master 1

AC1375: Menu screen not available.

Safety Master 1

Select AS-i master with [OK].

130

OK

ESC

AS-i 1 diagnost.

Step 6:

Voltage Disturb.

AC1375: Menu screen number = 72

Config. Error

Press [ ] to scroll to [Telegr. Error].

131

OK

ESC

AS-i 1 diagnost.

Step 7:

Config. Error

AC1375: Menu screen number = 72

Telegr. Error

Select [Telegr. Error] with [OK].

131

OK

ESC

AS-i master 1
Telegr. Error Count.
0.4 %

Step 8:
AC1375: Menu screen number = 29

>

Dynamic display of AS-i telegram errors in per cent of the transmitted

telegrams.

>

Dynamic display of AS-i telegram errors per second.

48 / s

MORE

51

ESC

Scroll to the next screen with [MORE].

231

ifm AS-Interface manual tips and tricks for users edition 2.1
AS-i system check

Fault analysis via the controller (AC13nn)

AS-i master 1

Step 9:

Performance

AC1375: Menu screen number = 49

>

4 slave(s) active
1328 cycles / [s]

MORE

95

2012-09-26

ESC

Dynamic display of the performance of this master:

number of active slaves,

number of AS-i cycles per second.

Press [ESC] to return to the start screen.

Fault analysis AS-i telegram errors on the master

6713

In uncritical applications, telegram errors < 1 % during one second are acceptable if no configuration
errors occur in the measured period.
Plant technology and safety technology potentially are two exceptions.

In plant technology, there are applications in which standstill must be absolutely avoided. Here, it
can make sense to come close to the theoretical ideal of the absence of repetitions.

A second special case are safety-related installations to "Safety at Work". Here as well, repetitions
are allowed because they are intercepted by the system and do not restrict the safety.
In order to ensure a switch-off after maximum 40 ms, it is defined that the safety monitor is already
triggered after the fourth repetition of a telegram. Therefore, a burst error class 4 already leads to
the (unintended) switch-off and therefore reduced uptime of the system when using safe slaves.
Here, repetitions are therefore judged more critically.

232

ifm AS-Interface manual tips and tricks for users edition 2.1
AS-i system check

5.2.4

2012-09-26
Fault analysis via the controller (AC13nn)

Number of disturbed telegrams on the master (by noisy

slaves)
5962

You want to know how many disturbed telegrams the individual slaves have transmitted (since last
[Reset error counter]? The device shows it, sorted by the number of distorted telegrams.
Here you cannot see in detail when which error occurred.
chapter Troubleshooting ControllerE and gateways (AC13nn) ( page 207).
The error counter is reset...
- when the device is switched off and on again,
- with the function Reset error counter ( page 236).
[MENU] > [Diagnostics] > Select master > [Noisy Slaves]

Step 1:
Press [Menu].

MENU

USER

Quick Setup

Step 2:

PLC Setup

Press [ ] to scroll to [Diagnostics].

Slave Lists
OK

ESC

Slave Lists

Step 3:

Address Slave

Select [Diagnostics] with [OK].

Diagnostics
OK

ESC

233

ifm AS-Interface manual tips and tricks for users edition 2.1
AS-i system check

2012-09-26
Fault analysis via the controller (AC13nn)

Diagnostics of

Step 4:

AS-i Master 1

AC1375: Menu screen not available.

Safety Master 1

If necessary, press [ ] to scroll to another master.

OK

130

ESC

Slave List of

Step 5:

AS-i Master 1

AC1375: Menu screen not available.

Safety Master 1

Select AS-i master with [OK].

OK

130

ESC

AS-i 1 diagnost.

Step 6:

Voltage Disturb.

AC1375: Menu screen number = 72

Config. Error

Press [ ] to scroll to [Noisy Slaves].

OK

131

ESC

AS-i 1 diagnost.

Step 7:

Telegr. Error

AC1375: Menu screen number = 72

Noisy Slaves

Select [Noisy Slaves] with [OK].

OK

234

131

ESC

ifm AS-Interface manual tips and tricks for users edition 2.1
AS-i system check

Fault analysis via the controller (AC13nn)

AS-i 1 Noisy Slv.

IX
1
2

SORT

Slv.
7
6A
134

2012-09-26

Tele.
122
83

Step 8:
AC1375: Menu screen number = 71

>

ESC

Dynamic display of the number of disturbed telegrams of the different

slaves, sorted by frequency of occurrence:

Column "IX": Number of ranking (frequency of occurence),

Column "Slv.": Address of the slave,

Column "Tele.": Number of disturbed telegrams,

only AC1375: Column "Config": Configuration error counter

Press [SORT] for a new sorting according to the current ranking.

Press [ ] or [ ] to scroll to the slaves with higher or lower rank
order.
OR:
Press [ESC] to return to the start screen.

235

ifm AS-Interface manual tips and tricks for users edition 2.1
AS-i system check

5.2.5

2012-09-26
Fault analysis via the controller (AC13nn)

Reset error counter

5964

Here you will find out how you can reset the error counter of the device in the diagnostic memory.

NOTE
Do not reset the diagnostic memory of the device before the analysis of the values stored so far.
The reset process cannot be reversed.
.

Password level 1 required: chapter Password setting.

.

[MENU] > [Diagnostics] > Select master > [Reset Error Count.] > [OK]
.

Step 1:
Press [Menu].

MENU

USER

Quick Setup

Step 2:

PLC Setup

Press [ ] to scroll to [Diagnostics].

Slave Lists
OK

ESC

Slave Lists

Step 3:

Address Slave

Select [Diagnostics] with [OK].

Diagnostics
OK

236

ESC

ifm AS-Interface manual tips and tricks for users edition 2.1
AS-i system check

2012-09-26
Fault analysis via the controller (AC13nn)

Diagnostics of

Step 4:

AS-i master 1

AC1375: Menu screen not available.

Safety Master 1

If necessary, press [ ] to scroll to another master.

OK

130

ESC

Slave List of

Step 5:

AS-i master 1

AC1375: Menu screen not available.

Safety Master 1

Select AS-i master with [OK].

OK

130

ESC

AS-i 1 diagnost.

Step 6:

Voltage Disturb.

AC1375: Menu screen number = 72

Config. Error

Press [ ] to scroll to [Reset Error Count.]

OK

131

ESC

AS-i 1 diagnost.

Step 7:

Noisy Slaves

AC1375: Menu screen number = 72

Reset Error Count.

Select [Reset Error Count.] with [OK].

OK

131

ESC

AS-i master 1
Reset Error Count.?

Step 8:
AC1375: Menu screen number = 30

>
OK

52

ESC

Safety query:
"Reset Error Count.?"

Reset all error counters with [OK].

>

Return to screen ( step 7).

Alternatively:
Exit the screen with [ESC] without changing the error counters.

237

ifm AS-Interface manual tips and tricks for users edition 2.1
AS-i system check

2012-09-26
Error analysis via the gateway (AC14nn)

5.3

Error analysis via the gateway (AC14nn)

Show / delete error counter....................................................................................................... 238
Show error messages of the slaves .......................................................................................... 239
Show evaluation of the voltage supply...................................................................................... 239
Show performance of the AS-i master ...................................................................................... 240
Online support center (OSC)..................................................................................................... 241
11378
9039

Sequence from the start screen:

or

>

Detailed description: following chapters

5.3.1

Show / delete error counter

9042

Sequence from the start screen:

or

>

> tab [Error counters]

Detailed description:
Here the device shows the counter reading of the following errors since the last reset.
Set all counter readings to zero with button [Reset] .
>

Display error counter telegrams

>

Display error counter configuration

>

Display error counter voltage < 22.5 V

>

Display error counter voltage < 19.0 V

>

Display error counter earth faults

Use several times the function key [Back] to go to the start screen.

238

ifm AS-Interface manual tips and tricks for users edition 2.1

2012-09-26

AS-i system check

Error analysis via the gateway (AC14nn)

5.3.2

Show error messages of the slaves

9087

Sequence from the start screen:

or

>

> tab [Errors / slave]

Detailed description:
Here the device shows the counter reading of the telegram errors messages per slave since the last
reset:
Address

= address of the AS-i slave

S/A

= error counter of a single or A slave on this address

= error counter of a B slave on this address

Use [Select] or [] to switch to the slave list.

Use [] / [] to scroll in the slave list.
Use several times the function key [Back] to go to the start screen.

5.3.3

Show evaluation of the voltage supply

9088

Sequence from the start screen:

or

>

> tab [Power supply]

Detailed description:
Here the device displays the status of the voltage supply:
Parameter

Meaning

Contents

Power supply:

method of the device supply

chapter Power supply concepts
( page 44)

Aux
= separated supply AS-i and AUX 24 V
AS-i
= supply only from AS-i network 1
Power24
= supply from data decoupling module

AS-i voltage:

AS-i voltage measured

DC earth fault:

evaluation of the network symmetry

value in [V]
(green) = AS-i network is symmetrical
(yellow) = AS-i network is asymmetrical
(red) = AS-i network has earth fault

= graphical display of the network symmetry

Use several times the function key [Back] to go to the start screen.

239

ifm AS-Interface manual tips and tricks for users edition 2.1
AS-i system check

2012-09-26
Error analysis via the gateway (AC14nn)

5.3.4

Show performance of the AS-i master

9089

Sequence from the start screen:

or

>

> tab [Performance]

Detailed description:
Here the device shows the number of the active AS-i slaves and the cycle times for each AS-i master
since the last reset:
>

Display number of the active AS-i slaves on the AS-i master.

>

Display of the shortest cycle time.

>

Display of the longest cycle time.

>

Display of the current cycle time.

Use the button [Reset] to delete the shortest and longest time measurement.
Use several times the function key [Back] to go to the start screen.

240

ifm AS-Interface manual tips and tricks for users edition 2.1
AS-i system check

5.3.5

2012-09-26
Error analysis via the gateway (AC14nn)

Online support center (OSC)

7058

OSC = Online Support Center

The OSC summarises all fault indications and warnings in the display.
Press the left function key [Support] in the start menu.
>

Displays all fault messages

The focus is on the listbox [filter].
Example:

Use the function key [Select] to open the listbox.

Mark the requested parameter with [] / [].

- All
- AS-i 1
- AS-i 2 (if available)
- System
Use the function key [Select] to accept the change.
OR:
Use the function key [Back] to discard the change.
In both cases: exit the editing mode.
>

Display of the fault messages and warnings according to the filter setting.

Use [] / [] to scroll in the messages.

Use several times the function key [Back] to go to the start screen.

241

ifm AS-Interface manual tips and tricks for users edition 2.1
AS-i system check

5.4

2012-09-26
Fault analysis via the analyser

Fault analysis via the analyser

General ................................................................................................................................... 243
LED behaviour analyser (AC1145) ........................................................................................... 243
Online statistics (standard mode).............................................................................................. 244
Advanced Statistics ................................................................................................................... 245
Online statistics without PC....................................................................................................... 246
Data mode................................................................................................................................. 247
6708

e.g. eAS-i tester AC1145:

242

ifm AS-Interface manual tips and tricks for users edition 2.1

2012-09-26

AS-i system check

5.4.1

Fault analysis via the analyser

General
6715

The analyser monitors the entire telegram traffic in the AS-i network.

The analyser requires no additional power supply and no slave address.

Connect the terminals AS-i+ and AS-i- to the AS-i cable.

Install the software on the PC or notebook.

The analyser can be installed at any point in the AS-i network (preferably in the last third of the
AS-i line).

More and detailed information device manual:

www.ifm.com > Select your country > [Data sheet search] > (article number.) > [further information]

5.4.2

LED behaviour analyser (AC1145)

6716

The function of the analyser is signalled by 3 LEDs; their meaning depends on the operating status:
Normal operation with connected PC:
Diagnostic LEDs

LED
colour

LED off

LED lit

[Power]

green

---

the analyser is supplied via the AS- --Interface network

[Ser.act.]

yellow

---

active communication with the PC

---

[Test]

green

---

after trace start:

trigger released

---

red

---

after trace start:

trigger not released

---

LED flashes

Operation without connected PC:

When operated without PC, the traffic light LEDs on the analyser roughly indicate the status of the
network:
Diagnostic LEDs

LED
colour

LED off

LED lit

LED flashes

[Power]

green

---

all slaves operate reliably

---

[Ser.act.]

yellow

---

warning for one or several slaves

---

[Test]

red

---

serious failure

---

243

ifm AS-Interface manual tips and tricks for users edition 2.1
AS-i system check

5.4.3

2012-09-26
Fault analysis via the analyser

Online statistics (standard mode)

6720

The standard mode with the creation of the online statistics is the most common application of the
analyser. Here, the telegrams are evaluated mostly statistically in the analyser and transferred to the
PC for presentation and addition every second. The results are very easy to access for the user, are
immediately available and provide a clear overview of the function and possible faults of a network in
several grades. This mode is suited for protocolling the current status as well as for long-term tests.
Connect the analyser to the AS-i network.
>

The analyser continuously stores the current events.

Connect the analyser to the PC and start the analyser software there.
Main menu [Measure] > [Online Statistics].
>

Display of the current function overview of the AS-i network in the traffic lights representation
( figure).

Example: The traffic lights representation of the online statistics shows how well or badly the slaves communicate.

Green

< 1 % telegram repetitions in one second

Warning

1...5 % telegram repetitions in one second

Error

> 5 % telegram repetitions in one second or: Config Error

slave is present but not activated / not projected

Telegram repetitions up to 1 % can be considered as not of concern in many applications and are
therefore shown in green by the analyser.

244

ifm AS-Interface manual tips and tricks for users edition 2.1
AS-i system check

5.4.4

2012-09-26
Fault analysis via the analyser

Advanced Statistics
6721

In the "Advanced Statistics" you can see the following values (since the last reset):

for each slave the number of data calls of the master,

for each slave the number of missing slave replies,

the number of slave telegrams without master call,

the AS-i voltage at the location of the analyser,

the cycle time,

the measurement duration.

Example: The "advanced statistics" show quantitatively how often repetitions of the data calls were necessary.

The advanced statistics at the same time demonstrates the function of the bus and of the analyser.

The results of the analyser are transferred to the PC once per second and displayed there in this
rhythm.

In a network without repetitions, the number of master calls must be the same for all single slaves.

The number of calls to connected A and B slaves must be exactly half of the number of calls to
single slaves.

>

If a slave is suddenly removed from the system, it will be called in vain precisely 6 times and then
removed from the list of activated slaves in the master: the number of calls towards him does not
rise again before this slave is accepted again by the master and receives data calls.

The button [Hold] only stops the counts in the display. Counting however continues in the
background, as long as no other operating mode is activated. Pressing the button [Go] updates
the display again.

>

A [Stop] sign appears in the window when the statistic is stopped.

245

ifm AS-Interface manual tips and tricks for users edition 2.1
AS-i system check

5.4.5

2012-09-26
Fault analysis via the analyser

Online statistics without PC

6723

The online statistics can also be created without the PC and are therefore suitable for a long-term
check of a network.
If the analyser is started without communication to the PC, the 3 LEDs on the analyser have a different
meaning ( LED behaviour analyser (AC1145) ( page 243)).
Five restrictions are to be taken into account when working without a PC:

Measured values are only stored in the analyser as long as it is supplied from the AS-i network.
So, for evaluation the PC must be connected to the analyser on site.

If the PC is first connected to the analyser (for example for setup) and then removed again, the
data stored so far by the analyser will be deleted. The filter settings however remain unchanged!

The indication of the duration of measurement is generated by the PC, not by the analyser. So, a
duration of measurement cannot be indicated before the online statistics have been deleted at
least once by the PC and restarted.

The online statistics are also continued if the communication is temporarily interrupted by the
master or the application program but the voltage is maintained in the AS-i network.

The memory in the analyser is limited. In the continuous operation without connected PC, only the
data of maximum 14 days can be stored in the statistic mode.
When a counter reaches its maximum value, it does not continue.
When the PC is connected, this time is extended to about 1 year.

246

ifm AS-Interface manual tips and tricks for users edition 2.1

2012-09-26

AS-i system check

Fault analysis via the analyser

5.4.6

Data mode

Digital values ............................................................................................................................. 247

Analogue data ........................................................................................................................... 249
Safety data ................................................................................................................................ 250
6725

In the data mode, not the possible faults of the telegrams but the current, valid data of the slaves are
in the foreground. According to its mode of operation, the analyser adopts the current values about
once per second. Data available for a shorter time may not be displayed.
Three tabs are available:

digital values,

analogue data,

safety data.

Digital values
6729

Here, all I/O data currently exchanged with each individual slave are displayed in a binary way, in the
following structure:
Data
Bit

Output
3

Input
0

Example: Display digital values in the data mode

247

ifm AS-Interface manual tips and tricks for users edition 2.1
AS-i system check

2012-09-26
Fault analysis via the analyser

NOTES for a correct interpretation:

According to the PLC standard EN 61131, binary output data are sent as "1" for a HIGH level, as
"0" for a LOW level. This applies to communication between the controller and the master in the
"process image of the outputs".
According to the AS-Interface standards IEC 62026-2 and EN 50295, the opposite applies to the
"AS-Interface level" in the AS-i network.
Both representations are possible, so that depending on the situation the comparison with the data
of the controller or within the network becomes easier:

Select in the menu under [Options] > [Statistics] whether the outputs are to be indicated as [ASInterface level output] or as [Process Image Output].

In each data call, 4 bits are exchanged between the master and the slave in both directions. This
also applies when individual bits are insignificant. Therefore, the analyser for example also shows
4 output bits for a pure input slave. But they do not have any significance for the application.

For analogue slaves and safety-related slaves, the input and/or output values transferred in the
network constantly change. This can be detected every second and corresponds to the function of
AS-Interface. It is not possible to detect a fault with this.

For A/B slaves according to the specification C.S.2.1 the output bit A3 of the data call is not
available as a useable output value, but serves for the distinction between A and B slaves. Output
bit A3 of the data call for A/B slaves therefore always has fixed values.

248

ifm AS-Interface manual tips and tricks for users edition 2.1

2012-09-26

AS-i system check

Fault analysis via the analyser

Analogue data
6731

Here, the data of the analogue slaves given in the network operating to the profiles S-7.3.x will be
displayed. The display remains empty for digital slaves ( figure below).

NOTE
The analyser has to convert the detected data telegrams according to the profile of the slaves.
Prerequisite for the correct display therefore is that the analyser knows the profile of the individual
connected device. So, it needs to have monitored the integration of the slaves into the communication
at least once, so that all 4 configuration data are recorded in the display.
In the profile, the details of the communication as well as the type and number of the channels are
defined, however not the physical signification of the values. It is defined by the manufacturer, so that
very different slaves can be implemented. But the user of the analyser has to convert the obtained
values according to the calibration curve of the device.
If a slave indicates a value 'above range' by its overflow bit, this is displayed by an additional point in
the corresponding channel.

Figure: Analogue data in the data

mode

Example ( figure): There are analogue slaves at the addresses 8 and 10:

one 2-channel input slave (on the address 8) and

one 2-channel output slave (on the address 10).

In both cases, the value "0" corresponds to the voltage 0 V, the value 10 000 to a voltage of 10 V
according to the data sheet. So, the modules have a resolution of 1 mV. The displayed values
therefore result in:
input module on slave address 8

channel 0 = +8.821 V
channel 1 = 0 V

output module on slave address 10

channel 0 = +7.121 V
channel 1 = -0.051 V

249

ifm AS-Interface manual tips and tricks for users edition 2.1
AS-i system check

2012-09-26
Fault analysis via the analyser

Safety data
6732

The tab [Safety Data] shows for all safety-related slaves to "Safety at Work" whether the slave has
"released" or whether the contacts are closed.

NOTE

The display of the safety data is only valid for a short time similar to all I/O data , because it is
updated about every second.

Safety slaves which, after triggering, can only be enabled again by an external intervention
continue to send the trigger telegrams. The display "Released" persists during that time.

250

ifm AS-Interface manual tips and tricks for users edition 2.1

2012-09-26

AS-i system check

5.5

Earth fault / insulation fault monitoring

Earth fault / insulation fault monitoring

What is an earth fault? .............................................................................................................. 251
What does an insulation fault monitor do?................................................................................ 251
Symmetrical and asymmetrical earth faults .............................................................................. 252
Earth fault monitor AC2211....................................................................................................... 253
Earth fault / insulation fault monitor AC2212............................................................................. 254
6709

AS-i earth fault monitor AC2211

5.5.1

AS-i earth fault and insulation fault monitor AC2212

What is an earth fault?

6870

An earth fault can occur if the AS-i voltage or sensor cables connected to it are electrically connected
to earth. This is an undesired state which can reduce noise immunity as AS-i is a symmetric, earthfree system in accordance with PELV. A second earth fault can lead to earth loops which continuously
supply the outputs with current.

5.5.2

What does an insulation fault monitor do?

6871

An insulation fault monitor monitors the insulation condition of an IT network (an ungrounded power
network) for values below a minimum insulation resistance.
Insulation fault monitors are used where power supplies or their secondary side need to be single-fault
safe, i.e. where a single fault (single-pole earth fault) must not lead to a failure of the power supply or
of the respective secondary side.
The earth fault / insulation fault monitor is a passive participant in the AS-i network and does not
require a slave address.

251

ifm AS-Interface manual tips and tricks for users edition 2.1

2012-09-26

AS-i system check

5.5.3

Earth fault / insulation fault monitoring

Symmetrical and asymmetrical earth faults

6741

Symmetrical and asymmetrical earth faults are differentiated as follows:

Asymmetrical earth fault:

252

Symmetrical earth fault:

ifm AS-Interface manual tips and tricks for users edition 2.1
AS-i system check

5.5.4

2012-09-26
Earth fault / insulation fault monitoring

Earth fault monitor AC2211

6737

Detection of asymmetrical earth faults

Use for earth fault monitoring in ungrounded AS-i and 24 V DC systems (IT system)

Passive asymmetrical measuring method

1 NO contact

Wiring and LED behaviour AC2211

6743

Button TEST / RESET:

Pressed briefly (< 1 s) = RESET
Pressed for a longer time (> 2 s) = TEST

Signal contact 11/14:

The contact 11/14 is closed when the AS-i voltage is applied and there is no earth fault
(asymmetric).

LED Power:
lights green = AS-i voltage applied.

LED Alarm:
lights yellow = asymmetrical fault.

253

ifm AS-Interface manual tips and tricks for users edition 2.1
AS-i system check

5.5.5

2012-09-26
Earth fault / insulation fault monitoring

Earth fault / insulation fault monitor AC2212

6742

Detection of symmetric and asymmetric insulation faults

Use for insulation monitoring in ungrounded AS-i and 24 V DC systems (IT system)

Active symmetrical and passive measuring method

2 NO contacts

Wiring and LED behaviour AC2212

6744

Button TEST / RESET:

Pressed briefly (< 1 s) = RESET
Pressed for a longer time (> 2 s) = TEST

Signal contact 11/24:

Contact 11/24 opens in case of symmetrical faults and asymmetrical faults.

Signal contact 11/14:

In addition, the contact 11/14 opens in case of asymmetric faults.

The contacts are closed when the AS-i voltage is applied and there is no fault.

LED Power:
lights green = AS-i voltage applied.

LED Alarm:
lights yellow = asymmetrical fault.
flashes yellow = symmetrical fault.

254

ifm AS-Interface manual tips and tricks for users edition 2.1

2012-09-26

AS-i system check

5.6

Symmetry measurement

Symmetry measurement
6710

To ensure optimum noise immunity against symmetrical interference injection, a well-balanced design
of the AS-i system is required. Therefore the terminal Shield/GND of the AS-i power supply always
needs to be connected to the machine ground.
Possible reasons for asymmetry (examples):

unwanted connection between AS-i + or also AS-i - and the machine ground,

faulty slaves,

faulty master,

faulty AS-i power supply,

capacitive ground connection of metal sensors (housing) to the machine ground.

Help for EMC problems can be found at ifm on the internet:

www.ifm.com > select your country > [data sheet search] > (article no.) > [Additional data]

5.6.1

Check the AS-i power supply

6748

Measurement of the power supply symmetry with a voltmeter under the following conditions:

power supply in open-circuit operation AND

AS-i cable not connected AND

Shield/GND not connected.

The following voltages should be measured:

between AS-i+ and Shield/GND

approx. +15 V DC

between AS-i- and Shield/GND

approx. -15 V DC

between AS-i+ and AS-i-

approx. 30.5 V DC

These two values must be symmetrical and should not

be significantly below the value of +/- 15 V DC.

255

ifm AS-Interface manual tips and tricks for users edition 2.1

2012-09-26

AS-i system check

5.6.2

Symmetry measurement

Check the AS-i symmetry

6749

Measurement of the AS-i symmetry with a voltmeter under the following conditions:

with connected slaves AND

Shield/GND not connected to the power supply.

The following voltages should be measured:

between AS-i+ and machine ground

approx. +15 V DC

between AS-i- and machine ground

approx. -15 V DC

between AS-i+ and AS-i-

approx. 30.5 V DC

The difference of the two voltages must be

maximum 2...3 V DC.

Measurement of the AS-i symmetry:

The higher the internal resistance of the measurement device, the more precise the result of
measurement.

256

ifm AS-Interface manual tips and tricks for users edition 2.1

2012-09-26

Glossary of Terms

Glossary of
Terms

A
A/B slave
AS-i slave with an A or B being appended to its
address number and which may therefore be
present twice on the master.

Acyclic data transmission

Usually data are transmitted to one slave at a
time by the master once per cycle (= cyclic
data transmission). Data transmission only at
certain events (e.g. when the device is
switched on or when values have been
changed) is called acyclic data transmission.

Address
This is the "name" of the bus participant. All
participants need a unique address so that the
signals can be exchanged without problem.

communication electronics and for participants

with a low current requirement. Loads with a
greater energy requirement additionally
receive a separate (black) flat cable for energy
supply with 24 V DC.
AS-Interface is a single master system. Up to
62 slaves can be connected per master. Each
of these slaves needs an unambiguous
address. The master cyclically pollspolling)
all projected slaves and exchanges the up to
248 input data and 186 output data with them.
www.as-interface.net AS-International
Association (user association)

AS-i cycle
An AS-i cycle contains the data exchange of
up to 31 slaves plus a telegram inclusion
phase plus, if required, a telegram
management phase ( AS-i phases (status
machine) ( page 257)). In the case of the
extended addressing mode, two AS-i cycles
are required for data transfer to all A/B slaves.

AS-i phases (status machine)

Application software
Software specific to the application,
implemented by the machine manufacturer,
generally containing logic sequences, limits
and expressions that control the appropriate
inputs, outputs, calculations and decisions
Necessary to meet the specific (SRP/CS)
requirements.
Programming language, safety-related

Architecture
Specific configuration of hardware and
software elements in a system.

AS-i
The AS-Interface (AS-i = Actuator Sensor
Interface) is a standard for fieldbus
communication to EN 50295 and IEC 62026-2.
It was developed for the connection of
actuators and sensors with a simple wiring to
replace the conventional parallel wiring.

Offline phase: No AS-i data traffic takes

place during initialisation.

Detection phase: In the detection phase,

the AS-i master first of all searches for
existing slaves - irrespective of whether
they are projected or not.

An unscreened two-wire yellow flat cable (max.

500 m) serves for data transmission as well as
for voltage supply (24...30 V DC) for the

Activation phase: In this phase, the found

slaves are activated depending on the
operating mode.
257

ifm AS-Interface manual tips and tricks for users edition 2.1

2012-09-26

Notes

Data exchange phase: The AS-i master

carries out cyclical data exchange with the
activated slaves.

- Device ID,
- Device Group ID.

Management phase: At the end of a cycle

the AS-i master goes into the management
phase, during which the master can send a
command to a specific slave (if requested).

CDI

Inclusion phase: After this, the AS-i master

goes into the inclusion phase, during which
it sends a command to a free slave
address to detect new slaves.

The configuration of the connected AS-i slaves

determined by the AS-i master:
LDS and AS-i profiles (IO, ID, ID1, ID2)

ASIsafe
The name for Safety at Work used by
Siemens.

B
Baud

CDI = Configuration Data Image = current AS-i

configuration

CoDeSys
CoDeSys is a registered trademark of 3S
Smart Software Solutions GmbH, Germany.
"CoDeSys for Automation Alliance" associates
companies of the automation industry whose
hardware devices are all programmed with the
widely used IEC 61131-3 development tool
CoDeSys.

Baud, abbrev.: Bd = unit for the data

transmission speed. Do not confuse baud with
"bits per second" (bps, bits/s). Baud indicates
the number of changes of state (steps, cycles)
per second over a transmission length. But it is
not defined how many bits per step are
transmitted. The name baud can be traced
back to the French inventor J. M. Baudot
whose code was used for telex machines.

Homepage http://www.3s-software.com

1 MBd = 1024 x 1024 Bd = 1 048 576 Bd

e.g. CTT2 = Combined Transaction Type 2

Combined transaction

ControllerE
Master in the AS-i bus system of the
generation E.

CTT

Burst errors
Burst errors are errors occurring depending on
others. The class indicates the maximum
permissible number of burst errors:
Class 1 = high protection,
Class 2 = lower protection etc.

Cycle time

PLC cycle: The PLC program performs

one complete run.

Bus

AS-i cycle: all AS-i slaves are updated

(5...10 ms).
The cycle time mainly depends on the AS-i
slaves involved in the data exchange.
Message errors and management phase
may extend the cycle time ( no constant
cycle time).

Serial data transmission of several participants

on the same cable.

This is the time for one cycle. The following

happens:

CCDI
CCDI = CTT Configuration Data Image =
current CTT configuration
Configuration of 7.4 and 7.5 slaves currently
determined by the AS-i master:
- Manufacturer ID,
- Vendor ID,
258

Cyclic data transmission

Data are transmitted to one slave at a time by
the master once per cycle.

ifm AS-Interface manual tips and tricks for users edition 2.1

2012-09-26

Notes

- value outside range.

Cyclical polling
AS-i master cyclically polls the data of all
slaves in the bus (see above). The data is
updated in the master after max. 5 ms. If A/B
slaves are used, the cycle time can be
extended to 10 ms.

D
Data image (AS-i)
See process image; sum of all digital and
analogue input and output data.
As regards the time, the data image represents
the current condition of each individual slave
and NOT a consistent image of the entire AS-i
network at an exact point in time.

DeviceNet
Fieldbus system for larger data volumes based
on CAN technology, requires special cables,
complex connection technology. Can be used
e.g. as a supplier for AS-i over longer
distances. Corresponding gateways are
available.

For diagnosis, configuration and log data can

be used, created during the "normal" operation
of the device.
The correct start of the system components is
monitored during the initialisation and start
phase. Errors are recorded in the log file.
For further diagnosis, self-tests can also be
carried out.

DRAM
DRAM = Dynamic Random Access Memory
Technology for an electronic memory module
with random access (Random Access
Memory, RAM). The memory element is a
capacitor which is either charged or
discharged. It becomes accessible via a
switching transistor and is either read or
overwritten with new contents. The memory
contents are volatile: the stored information is
lost in case of lacking operating voltage or too
late restart.

E
EMC

DHCP

EMC = Electro Magnetic Compatibility

DHCP = Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol

= protocol for the dynamic configuration by
thehost

According to the EC directive (2004/108/EEC)

concerning electromagnetic compatibility (in
short EMC directive) requirements are made
for electrical and electronic apparatus,
equipment, systems or components to operate
satisfactorily in the existing electromagnetic
environment. The devices must not interfere
with their environment and must not be
adversely influenced by external
electromagnetic interference.

DHCP is a protocol that provides dynamic

configuration of IP addresses and associated
information. The protocol supports use of
IP addresses which are only available in
limited number by a centralised management
of the address assignment.
The participant logs on to a server with this
service when it is switched on in a network for
the first time. The server assigns a local free
IP address to the participant.

Diagnosis
During the diagnosis, the "state of health" of
the device is checked. It is to be found out if
and what faults are given in the device.
Depending on the device, the inputs and
outputs can also be monitored for their correct
function.
- wire break,
- short circuit,

Ethernet
Ethernet is a widely used, manufacturerindependent technology which enables data
transmission in the network at a speed of 10 or
100 million bits per second (Mbps). Ethernet
belongs to the family of so-called "optimum
data transmission" on a non exclusive
transmission medium. The concept was
developed in 1972 and specified as
IEEE 802.3 in 1985.

259

ifm AS-Interface manual tips and tricks for users edition 2.1

2012-09-26

Notes

Due to the absence of moving parts, flash

is noiseless and insensitive to shocks and
magnetic fields.

In comparison to hard disks, flash

memories have a very short access time.
Read and write speed are virtually
constant across the entire memory area.

The memory size that can be obtained has

no upper limit, due to the simple and
space-saving arrangement of the storage
cells.

FC
FC = flat cable
The yellow or black AS-i cable is meant.

FE functional earth
Functional earth is a reference potential which
is not connected to protective earth or only
connected when special measures are taken.
The functional earth serves as equalisation of
potential for an ungrounded installation (e.g.
SELV).

Disadvantages of flash memories

A storage cell can tolerate a limited

number of write and delete processes:
- Multi-level cells: typ. 10 000 cycles
- Single level cells: typ. 100 000 cycles

Given that a write process writes memory

blocks of between 16 and 128 Kbytes at
the same time, memory cells which require
no change are used as well.

Fieldbus
A bus for industrial applications:
mechanically extremely robust and excellent
data protection.

Firmware
System software, basic program in the device,
virtually the operating system.

FMEA
FMEA = Failure Mode and Effects Analysis

The firmware establishes the connection

between the hardware of the device and the
user software. This software is provided by the
manufacturer of the controller as a part of the
system and cannot be changed by the user.

Method of reliability engineering, to find

potential weak points. Within the framework of
quality or security management, the FMEA is
used preventively to prevent faults and
increase the technical reliability.

Flash memory

FRAM

Flash ROM (or flash EPROM or flash memory)

combines the advantages of semiconductor
memory and hard disks. Just like every other
semiconductor memory the flash memory does
not require moving parts. And the data is
maintained after switch-off, similar to a hard
disk.

FRAM, or also FeRAM, means Ferroelectric

Random Access Memory. The storage
operation and erasing operation is carried out
by a polarisation change in a ferroelectric
layer.

The flash ROM evolved from the EEPROM

(Electrical Erasable and Programmable ReadOnly Memory). The storage function of data in
the flash ROM is identical to the EEPROM.
Similar to a hard disk, the data are however
written and deleted blockwise in data blocks up
to 64, 128, 256, 1024, ... bytes at the same
time.
Advantages of flash memories

260

The stored data are maintained even if

there is no supply voltage.

Advantages of FRAM as compared to

conventional read-only memories:

non-volatile,

compatible with common EEPROMs, but:

access time approx. 100 ns,

nearly unlimited access cycles possible.

ifm AS-Interface manual tips and tricks for users edition 2.1

2012-09-26

Notes

G
Gateway
Gateway = access, coupler
Gateways enable connection of completely
different systems. Gateways are used when
two incompatible network types are to be
connected by converting the protocol of one
system to the protocol of the other system.
Example: connection between AS-i and higherlevel fieldbus systems such as Ethernet DP,
DeviceNet, Interbus-S or other interfaces,
e.g. RS-485. The device includes an AS-i
master which is directly coupled to the host
interface (e.g. Ethernet DP slave).

Gateway transfer time

The time that is needed for the input data in
the DP-RAM of the AS-i master to be copied
into the output data of the netX, and vice
versa. The distance from DP-RAM to DP-RAM
is decisive.

GPL
GPL = General Public Licence
A licence issued by Free Software Foundation
with copyleft for licensing of free software. The
thus licensed program can be used for all
purposes without any restriction. Commercial
use is expressly permitted.

GSDML
GSDML = Generic Station Description Markup
Language
Description language which can describe the
characteristics of a device family across
several levels. In this XML scheme, as much
as possible of the semantics of the GSD was
adopted.

H
HMI
HMI = Human Machine Interface

Host
The controller in the hierarchy above the AS-i
master, e.g. a PLC or a processor.

I
I&M
I&M = Identification & Maintenance
chapter I&M data
Profibus Profile Guidelines Part 1:
Identification & Maintenance Functions

ID
ID = Identifier

Generic Station Description

Name to differentiate the devices / participants

connected to a system or the message
packets transmitted between the participants.

Describes the interface to the device to be

connected to the fieldbus.

Instructions

GSD

You can find the current version of the GSD

file on the ifm homepage:
DE https://www.ifm.com/ifmde/web/asi-download.htm
UK https://www.ifm.com/ifmgb/web/asi-download.htm
FR https://www.ifm.com/ifmfr/web/asi-download.htm
e.g. for AC1375:
GSD file for SmartLink AC1375
download the file ifm...07E5.gsd (... =
version)

Superordinate word for one of the following

terms:
installation instructions, data sheet, user
information, operating instructions, device
manual, installation information, online help,
system manual, programming manual, etc.

Intended use
Use of a product in accordance with the
information provided in the instructions for use.

261

ifm AS-Interface manual tips and tricks for users edition 2.1

2012-09-26

Notes

IO-Link

LFS

Point-to-point connection between 2 devices.

The following transmission is possible:
- binary signals or
- greater data fields for parameter setting.

List of Failed Slaves = list of slaves with

configuration errors
In this slave list the controller enters the slaves
with a projection error on this AS-i master.

www.io-link.com

Link
IP address
IP = Internet Protocol
The IP address is a number which is
necessary to clearly identify an internet
participant. For the sake of clarity the number
is written in 4 decimal values, e.g.
127.215.205.156.

J
Jitter
Jitter means a slight fluctuation in accuracy in
the transmission cycle when transmitting digital
signals. More generally, jitter in transmission
technology means an abrupt and undesired
change of the signal characteristics.

L
LAS
List of Active Slaves
In this slave list the ControllerE enters the
slaves detected as active for this AS-i master.

A link is a cross-reference to another part in

the document or to an external document.

LKCS
LKCS = List of Known CTT Slaves
In this list the CTT slaves (profile 7.4 and 7.5)
which are indicated in the LDS and whose CTT
configuration has already been read are
entered. This list is independent of the LDS,
LPS, LAS and LNACS.

LNACS
LNACS = List of Not Activated CTT Slaves
In this list, the CTT slaves (profiles 7.4 and
7.5) which have been detected as CTT slaves
but not activated are entered. As soon as the
slave is entered in the LAS, it is deleted from
this list. These slaves only take part in the data
exchange until the CTT configuration has been
read.

LPS

LDS

List of Projected Slaves

List of Detected Slaves

In this slave list the controller enters the slaves

projected for this AS-i master.

In this slave list the controller enters the slaves

detected as present for this AS-i master.

LSB

LED

Least Significant Bit/Byte

LED = Light Emitting Diode

Light emitting diode, also called luminescent

diode, an electronic element of high coloured
luminosity at small volume with negligible
power loss.

MAC-ID
MAC = Manufacturers Address Code
= manufacturer's serial number
ID = Identifier

262

ifm AS-Interface manual tips and tricks for users edition 2.1

2012-09-26

Notes

Every network card has a MAC address, a

clearly defined worldwide unique numerical
code, more or less a kind of serial number.
Such a MAC address is a sequence of
6 hexadecimal numbers, e.g. "00-0C-6E-D002-3F".

IP addressing is used.

Master

MRAM

Handles the complete organisation on the bus.

The master decides on the bus access time
and polls the slaves cyclically.

MRAM means Magnetoresistive Random

Access Memory. The information is stored by
means of magnetic storage elements. The
property of certain materials is used to change
their electrical resistance when exposed to
magnetic fields.

Master-slave communication
AS-i strictly operates to the master-slave
principle. The master polls all slaves one after
the other in always the same order. Only one
master per network line is allowed (cyclical
polling).

Example: 192.168.83.28.1 means unit ID 1 on

IP address 192.168.83.28.
*) Modicon passed from AEG to the group
Schneider in 1994.

Advantages of MRAM as compared to

conventional RAM memories:

non volatile (like FRAM), but:

access time only approx. 35 ns,

unlimited number of access cycles

possible.

MBd
MegaBaud
Baud, abbrev.: Bd = unit for the data
transmission speed. Do not confuse baud with
"bits per second" (bps, bits/s). Baud indicates
the number of changes of state (steps, cycles)
per second over a transmission length. But it is
not defined how many bits per step are
transmitted. The name baud can be traced
back to the French inventor J. M. Baudot
whose code was used for telex machines.

MSB
Most Significant Bit/Byte

O
Operating system

1 MBd = 1024 x 1024 Bd = 1 048 576 Bd

Basic program in the device, establishes the

connection between the hardware of the
device and the user software.

MMI

OSC

HMI ( page 261)

OSC = Online Support Center Online support

center (OSC) ( page 241)
Help system in the device

Modbus
The Modbus protocol is a communication
protocol based on a master/slave
architecture and was generated by Modicon in
1979 for communication with its PLCs. In the
industry, Modbus has become a de facto
standard.
Modbus/TCP is based on Ethernet TCP/IP.
Modbus/TCP ports the protocol defined for the
serial interface to TCP. The IP address
clearly identifies each device in a network.
Therefore the slave address was used to
identify one of several logical units (unit IDs) in
a physical device. To do so, the extended

OSSD
OSSD = Output Signal Switching Device
= output signal of a switching device. Here:
output signal of an AS-i safety monitor.

P
Password
In the menu [System Setup], menu item
[Password] the handling can be restricted or
enabled. When delivered, the device is in the
user mode. By entering an invalid password
263

ifm AS-Interface manual tips and tricks for users edition 2.1

2012-09-26

Notes

(e.g. 1000) all menu items which can change

settings are blocked.

PLC configuration
Part of the CoDeSys user interface.

PCCD
PCCD = Projected CTT Configuration Data
Configuration data for the 7.4 and 7.5 slaves
stored in the device:
- Manufacturer ID,
- Vendor ID,
- Device ID,
- Device Group ID.

PCD
PCD = Projected Configuration Data
Configuration data stored in the device:
LPS and AS-i profile (IO, ID, ID1, ID2)

PDM
PDM = Process and Dialogue Module
Device for communication of the operator with
the machine / plant.

PELV
PELV = Protective Extra Low Voltage
Functional extra low voltage with safe
separation, grounded variant of SELV.
Extra low voltage with safe separation
(grounded variant of SELV). The specification
as PELV system to IEC 364-4-41 covers a
measure to protect against direct and indirect
contact with dangerous voltages by a "safe
separation" between primary and secondary
side in the device (e.g. power supply to PELV
specification).

The programmer tells the programming

system which hardware is to be
programmed.
>

CoDeSys loads the corresponding

libraries.

>

Reading and writing the periphery states

(inputs/outputs) is possible.

Polling
to poll = to count votes
The controller master fetches the data from
every participant in the system successively:
1. Master calls participant 1.
2. Participant 1 replies with its current data
(actual values).
3. Master transfers more data (target values)
to participant 1, if needed.
4. Participant 1 acknowledges reception of
the data.
etc. the same procedure for each further
participant.
Cyclical polling: AS-i master cyclically polls the
data of all slaves in the bus (see above).
The data is updated in the master after max.
5 ms. If A/B slaves are used, the cycle time
can be extended to 10 ms.

Power-on delay time

The time required by the controller K6 from the
application of the voltage supply until all of the
following targets are reached:

For this reason no separate PE conductor is

required in a PELV system. It is allowed to
ground circuits and / or bodies in a PELV
system.

both AS-i networks have reached normal

operation

the master has read the configuration data

of the CTTx slaves

Pictogram

the field buses can use the gateway

(optional)

the PLC program was started (optional).

Pictograms are figurative symbols which

convey information by a simplified graphic
representation.
chapter What do the symbols and formats
mean? ( page 8)

264

ifm AS-Interface manual tips and tricks for users edition 2.1

2012-09-26

Notes

Process image
Process image is the status of the inputs and
outputs the PLC operates with within one
cycle.

At the beginning of the cycle the PLC

reads the conditions of all inputs into the
process image.
During the cycle the PLC cannot detect
changes to the inputs.

During the cycle the outputs are only

changed virtually (in the process image).

At the end of the cycle the PLC writes the

virtual output states to the real outputs.

the type of data exchange, to meet the

requirements regarding the speed.
For Profinet, there are the two perspectives
Profinet-CBA and Profinet-IO:

Profinet-CBA (Component Based

Automation) is intended for the
component-based communication via
TCP/IP and the real-time communication
for real-time requirements in modular plant
construction. Both ways of communication
can be used in parallel.

Profinet-IO has been created for real-time

(RT) and synchronous communication IRT
(IRT = isochronous real-time) with the
decentralised periphery. The designations
RT and IRT only describe the real-time
characteristics in the communication within
Profinet-IO.

Profibus
PROFIBUS (Process Field Bus) is a standard
for fieldbus communication in automation
technology. There are three versions of
PROFIBUS, DP being the one most widely
used.

PROFIBUS-DP (decentralised periphery)

for the control of sensors and actuators by
a central controller in manufacturing
engineering and for networking of several
controllers among each other. Data rates
up to 12 Mbits/s on twisted two-wire cables
and/or fibre optics are possible.
PROFIBUS-PA (process automation) is
used for the control of measurement
devices by a process control system in
process technology and is suited for
hazardous areas (zones 0 and 1). Only a
limited current flows on the bus cables in
an intrinsically safe circuit so that even in
case of a problem no explosive sparks can
occur. A disadvantage of PROFIBUS-PA is
the relatively slow data transfer rate of
31.25 Kbits/s.

www.profibus.com (umbrella organisation)

R
Redundant
Redundancy is the presence of more than the
necessary means so that a function unit
performs a requested function or that data can
represent information.
Several kinds of redundancy are distinguished:

Functional redundancy aims at designing

safety-related systems in multiple ways in
parallel so that in the event of a failure of
one component the others ensure the task.

In addition it is tried to separate redundant

systems from each other with regard to
space. Thus the risk that they are affected
by a common interference is minimised.

Finally, components from different

manufacturers are sometimes used to
avoid that a systematic fault causes all
redundant systems to fail (diverse
redundancy).

www.profibus.com (umbrella organisation)

Profinet

The software of redundant systems should

differ in the following aspects:

PROFINET (Process Field Network) is the

open Industrial Ethernet Standard of Profibus
& Profinet International (PI) for automation.
Profinet uses TCP/IP and IT standards, is realtime Ethernet compatible and enables the
integration of fieldbus systems.

specification (different teams),

specification language,

programming (different teams),

programming language,

The Profinet concept has a modular design, so

that the user can choose the functionality
himself. This is basically different as regards

compiler.

265

ifm AS-Interface manual tips and tricks for users edition 2.1

2012-09-26

Notes

Remanent

SELV

Remanent data is protected against data loss

in case of power failure.

SELV = Safety Extra Low Voltage

The operating system for example

automatically copies the remanent data to a
flash memory as soon as the voltage supply
falls below a critical value. If the voltage supply
is available again, the operating system loads
the remanent data back to the RAM memory.
The data in the RAM memory of a controller,
however, is volatile and normally lost in case of
power failure.

RTC
RTC = Real Time Clock
Provides (batter-backed) the current date and
time. Frequent use for the storage of error
message protocols.

RTS
RTS = Run Time System
Runtime systems are basic versions of
applications. These minimum versions are
supplied with certain products to meet the
prerequisites for the execution of the actual
product or to be able to look at or use results
generated by this product on other processors:
making available all routines required to
execute a program in a programming
language, e.g. interactions with the
operating system, memory requirements,
error routines, inputs and outputs.

Active parts of safety extra low voltage circuits

must neither be connected to ground nor to
protective wires of other circuits. They must be
safely separated from active parts with higher
voltage.
SELV circuit = secondary circuit (output
voltage) which is rated and protected so that
its voltages do not exceed a safe value in case
of correct operation (of the power supply) or in
case of a single fault (of the power supply).
SELV circuits are separated from the input
voltage (mains voltage) by double or enhanced
insulation. The voltage value must not exceed
60 V DC (or 42.4 V AC).

Single slave
Slave whose address number may only
occur once on the master.

Slave
Passive participant on the bus, only replies on
request of the master. Slaves have a clearly
defined and unique address in the bus.

Slave configuration

SD card

The following terms need to be distinguished...

- AS-i projected configuration
(PCD ( page 264)),
- AS-i current configuration
(CDI ( page 258)),
- CTT projected configuration
(PCCD ( page 264)),
- CTT current configuration
(CCDI ( page 258)).

An SD memory card (short for Secure Digital

Memory Card) is a digital storage medium that
operates to the principle of flash storage.

Symbols

Self-test
Test program that actively tests components or
devices. The program is started by the user
and takes a certain time. The result is a test
protocol (log file) which shows what was tested
and if the result is positive or negative.

266

Pictograms are figurative symbols which

convey information by a simplified graphic
representation.
chapter What do the symbols and formats
mean? ( page 8)

ifm AS-Interface manual tips and tricks for users edition 2.1

2012-09-26

Notes

System variable

Unit ID

Variable to which access can be made via IEC

address or symbol name from the PLC.

Modbus

Use, intended

Target

Use of a product in accordance with the

information provided in the instructions for use.

The target indicates the target system where

the PLC program is to run. The target contains
the files (drivers and if available specific help
files) required for programming and parameter
setting.

TCP
The Transmission Control Protocol is part of
the TCP/IP protocol family. Each TCP/IP data
connection has a transmitter and a receiver.
This principle is a connection-oriented data
transmission. In the TCP/IP protocol family the
TCP as the connection-oriented protocol
assumes the task of data protection, data flow
control and takes measures in the event of
data loss. (compare: UDP)

W
Watchdog
In general the term watchdog is used for a
component of a system which watches the
function of other components. If a possible
malfunction is detected, this is either signalled
or suitable program branchings are activated.
The signal or branchings serve as a trigger for
other co-operating system components to
solve the problem.

U
UDP
UDP (User Datagram Protocol) is a minimal
connectionless network protocol which belongs
to the transport layer of the internet protocol
family. The task of UDP is to ensure that data
which is transmitted via the internet is passed
to the right application.
At present network variables based on CAN
and UDP are implemented. The values of the
variables are automatically exchanged on the
basis of broadcast messages. In UDP they are
implemented as broadcast messages, in CAN
as PDOs. These services are not confirmed by
the protocol, i.e. it is not checked whether the
message is received. Exchange of network
variables corresponds to a "1 to n connection"
(1 transmitter to n receivers).

267

ifm AS-Interface manual tips and tricks for users edition 2.1

2012-09-26

Notes

Index

A
A/B slave ............................................................................... 257
Acyclic data transmission ...................................................... 257
Address ................................................................................. 257
Address Slaves........................................................................ 38
Address slaves with IR interface ........................................... 202
Addressing........... 76, 90, 92, 104, 123, 132, 144, 150, 156, 159
Addressing mode................................................................... 200
Addressing unit AC1154........................................................ 194
Adjusting the cable guide on the lower part .................. 119, 140
Adjusting the cable guide on the upper part.................. 120, 141
Advanced Statistics ............................................................... 245
Analogue data ....................................................................... 249
Analogue inputs 0...10 V (AC2217)......................................... 79
Analogue inputs 0...10 V (AC2517)....................................... 108
Analogue inputs 0...10 V (AC2617)......................................... 94
Analogue inputs 4...20 mA (AC2216)...................................... 78
Analogue inputs 4...20 mA (AC2516, AC2566)..................... 107
Analogue inputs 4...20 mA (AC2526).................................... 108
Analogue inputs 4...20 mA (AC2616)...................................... 93
Analogue inputs 4...20 mA (AC2916).................................... 161
Analogue inputs 4...20 mA (AC2923).................................... 162
Analogue inputs 4...20 mA (AC5222).................................... 125
Analogue inputs 4...20 mA (AC5223).................................... 126
Analogue outputs 0...10 V (AC2219)....................................... 84
Analogue outputs 0...10 V (AC2519)..................................... 113
Analogue outputs 0...10 V (AC2619)....................................... 99
Analogue outputs 0...20 mA (AC2218).................................... 83
Analogue outputs 0...20 mA (AC2518, AC2521, AC2568) ... 112
Analogue outputs 0...20 mA (AC2618).................................... 98
Analogue temperature measurement Pt100 (AC2220)........... 81
Analogue temperature measurement Pt100 (AC2520, AC2570)
.......................................................................................... 110
Analogue temperature measurement Pt100 (AC2620)........... 96
Application examples for cable extensions ........................... 184
Application software .............................................................. 257
Approved lubricants for lubricated compressed air ....... 135, 147
Architecture ........................................................................... 257
Arrow keys............................................................................... 51
AS-i........................................................................................ 257
AS-i cycle............................................................................... 257
AS-i flat cable overview ........................................................... 14
AS-i master command errors error codes M01...M44 ........ 212
AS-i phases (status machine) ............................................... 257
AS-i system check ................................................................. 207
AS-i system errors error codes E10...E32.......................... 209
AS-i telegram errors on the master ....................................... 230
AS-i topology ........................................................................... 13
ASIsafe .................................................................................. 258
Auxiliary air ............................................................................ 134

B
Baud ...................................................................................... 258
Boot errors error codes B00...B11...................................... 208
Burst errors............................................................................ 258
Bus......................................................................................... 258
Bus termination at the end of the long cable ......................... 182

C
CCDI...................................................................................... 258

268

CDI......................................................................................... 258
Change addresses of individual AS-i slaves ........................... 65
Change of parameter data via command channels ................ 42
Changing slave parameter data .............................................. 41
Characteristics....................................................... 15, 17, 19, 21
Check the AS-i power supply ................................................ 255
Check the AS-i symmetry...................................................... 256
CoDeSys ............................................................................... 258
Comparison of cable extension methods .............................. 183
Connecting analogue periphery ............................................ 160
Connecting analogue periphery (AC2216...AC2220).............. 77
Connecting analogue periphery (AC25nn) ............................ 106
Connecting analogue periphery (AC2616...AC2620).............. 92
Connecting analogue periphery (AC52nn) ............................ 124
ControllerE............................................................................. 258
Core cross sections ..................................................... 69, 72, 74
CTT........................................................................................ 258
Cycle time.............................................................................. 258
Cyclic data transmission........................................................ 258
Cyclical polling....................................................................... 259

D
Data image (AS-i) .................................................................. 259
Data mode ............................................................................. 247
Device description addressing units...................................... 193
Device description AS-i gateways (AC14nn)........................... 43
Device description AS-i power supplies (AC1216, AC1218,
AC1223, AC1224, AC1226) ............................................... 67
Device description AS-i power supplies (AC1220, AC1221)... 71
Device description AS-i power supplies (AC1236, AC1244)... 73
Device description cabinet modules........................................ 89
Device description control cabinet modules SmartLine
(AC22nn) ............................................................................ 75
Device description ControllerE, gateways (AC13nn) .............. 29
Device description field modules AirBox (quick mounting,
AC52nn)............................................................................ 137
Device description field modules AirBox (screw mounting,
AC20nn)............................................................................ 131
Device description field modules ClassicLine (quick mounting,
AC52nn)............................................................................ 116
Device description field modules ClassicLine (screw mounting,
AC25nn)............................................................................ 103
Device description field modules CompactLine (AC24nn, as
from June 2010)................................................................ 152
Device description field modules CompactLine (AC24nn, to
June 2010)........................................................................ 148
Device description field modules ProcessLine...................... 158
Device description IP 67 splitter ............................................ 171
Device description passive bus termination .......................... 191
Device description ProcessLine splitter................................. 166
Device description repeater................................................... 185
Device description repeater, tuner, bus termination.............. 181
Device description tuner ........................................................ 188
Device description universal modules (AC20nn, AC26nn) ..... 91
Device descriptions ................................................................. 29
DeviceNet .............................................................................. 259
Devices with Profibus DP interface ......................................... 41
DHCP..................................................................................... 259
Diagnosis............................................................................... 259
Diagnostic LED
Basic device...................................................................................49
Fieldbus Profinet............................................................................49

Diagnostics .............................................................................. 39
Differences AC5222 / AC5223 ............................................. 128
Digital values ......................................................................... 247
Display..................................................................................... 53

ifm AS-Interface manual tips and tricks for users edition 2.1

2012-09-26

Notes

Display (presentation, language, contrast/brightness) ............ 34

DRAM .................................................................................... 259
Dual master in the centre of the machine.............................. 182

E
Earth fault / insulation fault monitor AC2212 ......................... 254
Earth fault / insulation fault monitoring .................................. 251
Earth fault monitor AC2211 ................................................... 253
Electrical connection... 30, 44, 71, 73, 76, 89, 91, 104, 123, 132,
144, 150, 156, 159, 186, 189
Electrical connection (AC1216...) ............................................ 68
EMC....................................................................................... 259
Error analysis via the gateway (AC14nn) .............................. 238
Error messages ..................................................................... 206
Error screen............................................................................. 35
Ethernet ................................................................................. 259
Extension of the AS-i cable length ........................................ 182

I
I&M ........................................................................................ 261
ID 261
ifm weltweit ifm worldwide ifm lchelle internationale ... 277
Important! ................................................................................ 11
Information about AS-i............................................................. 23
Infrared addressing................................................ 105, 150, 156
Installation variants........................................................ 118, 139
Installing quick mounting modules ................................ 117, 138
Installing the device ....................................................... 121, 142
Instructions ............................................................................ 261
Integrated earth fault monitor (optional) .................................. 69
Intended use.......................................................................... 261
IO-Link ................................................................................... 262
IP address ............................................................................. 262

Jitter....................................................................................... 262

Fault analysis AS-i telegram errors on the master ................ 232

Fault analysis configuration errors ........................................ 229
Fault analysis via the analyser .............................................. 242
Fault analysis via the controller (AC13nn)............................. 225
Fault analysis voltage failures ............................................... 227
FC260
FC insulation displacement connector E70498, E70499 ..... 179
FC insulation displacement connector AC5005 .................... 172
FC insulation displacement connector E70096 ..................... 173
FC insulation displacement connector E70381 ..................... 174
FC insulation displacement connector E70481 ..................... 175
FC insulation displacement connector E70483 ..................... 176
FC insulation displacement connector E70487 ..................... 178
FC insulation displacement connector, E70485, E70486 ..... 177
FE functional earth ............................................................. 260
Fieldbus ................................................................................. 260
Fieldbus Setup......................................................................... 39
Firmware................................................................................ 260
Flash memory........................................................................ 260
Flat cable AC4000 + AC4002.................................................. 15
Flat cable AC4001 + AC4006.................................................. 17
Flat cable AC4003 + AC4004.................................................. 19
Flat cable AC4007 + AC4008.................................................. 21
FMEA..................................................................................... 260
Focus....................................................................................... 55
FRAM..................................................................................... 260
Function keys .......................................................................... 51
Functions and features .......................................................... 194
Fuse mode (optional)............................................................... 69

G
Gateway ................................................................................ 261
Gateway transfer time ........................................................... 261
General.................................................................................. 243
General conditions................................................................... 45
GPL........................................................................................ 261
GSD....................................................................................... 261
GSDML.................................................................................. 261

H
History of the instructions ........................................................ 10
HMI ........................................................................................ 261
Host ....................................................................................... 261
How does the device react in case of a fault?....................... 224
How is this documentation structured? ..................................... 9

Key functions ..................................................................... 33, 50

L
LAS........................................................................................ 262
LDS........................................................................................ 262
LED........................................................................................ 262
LED [BUS FAIL]....................................................................... 32
LED [ETH NET] ....................................................................... 32
LED [PLC RUN]....................................................................... 32
LED behaviour (AC12nn) ........................................................ 70
LED behaviour (AC13nn) ........................................................ 31
LED behaviour (AC14nn) ........................................................ 49
LED behaviour (AC2032) ...................................................... 101
LED behaviour (AC2032, AC2035, AC2616...AC2620) ........ 101
LED behaviour (AC2035) ...................................................... 101
LED behaviour (AC2216) ........................................................ 87
LED behaviour (AC2216, AC2217) ......................................... 87
LED behaviour (AC2217) ........................................................ 87
LED behaviour (AC2218, AC2219) ......................................... 88
LED behaviour (AC2220) ........................................................ 88
LED behaviour (AC24nn) .............................................. 151, 157
LED behaviour (AC2516, AC2526, AC2566) ........................ 114
LED behaviour (AC2517) ...................................................... 115
LED behaviour (AC2518, AC2519, AC2521, AC2568) ......... 115
LED behaviour (AC2520) ...................................................... 115
LED behaviour (AC25nn) ...................................................... 114
LED behaviour (AC2616, AC2617) ....................................... 101
LED behaviour (AC2618, AC2619) ....................................... 102
LED behaviour (AC2620) ...................................................... 102
LED behaviour (AC27nn) ........................................................ 90
LED behaviour (AC2916) ...................................................... 164
LED behaviour (AC2923) ...................................................... 165
LED behaviour (AC29nn) ...................................................... 164
LED behaviour (AC5222, AC5223) ....................................... 130
LED behaviour (AC52nn) .............................................. 130, 147
LED behaviour AirBox (AC20nn)........................................... 136
LED behaviour AirBox (AC52nn)........................................... 147
LED behaviour analyser (AC1145)........................................ 243
LED behaviour of the digital modules.............. 85, 114, 130, 164
LED behaviour passive bus termination................................ 192
LED behaviour repeater ........................................................ 187
LED behaviour tuner.............................................................. 189
LED display of the logic PLC outputs ............................ 130, 147

269

ifm AS-Interface manual tips and tricks for users edition 2.1

2012-09-26

Notes

LEDs [PWR/COM], [PROJ], [CONF/PF], [24V PWR].............. 31

LEDs fieldbus interface............................................................ 33
LFS ........................................................................................ 262
Link ........................................................................................ 262
Link for IR addressing.............................................................. 68
List of errors........................................................................... 222
LKCS ..................................................................................... 262
LNACS................................................................................... 262
LPS........................................................................................ 262
LSB........................................................................................ 262

M
MAC-ID.................................................................................. 262
Main navigation bar ................................................................. 54
Master.................................................................................... 263
Master Setup ........................................................................... 39
Master-slave communication................................................. 263
MBd ....................................................................................... 263
Measuring range (AC2216) ..................................................... 80
Measuring range (AC2217) ..................................................... 80
Measuring range (AC2218) ............................................. 85, 100
Measuring range (AC2219) ..................................................... 85
Measuring range (AC2220) ..................................................... 82
Measuring range (AC2516, AC2526, AC2566) ..................... 109
Measuring range (AC2517) ................................................... 109
Measuring range (AC2518, AC2521, AC2568) ..................... 113
Measuring range (AC2519) ................................................... 113
Measuring range (AC2520, AC2570) .................................... 111
Measuring range (AC2616) ..................................................... 95
Measuring range (AC2617) ..................................................... 95
Measuring range (AC2619) ................................................... 100
Measuring range (AC2620) ..................................................... 97
Measuring range (AC2916, AC2923) .................................... 163
Menu navigation ...................................................................... 38
Menu screen............................................................................ 34
MMI........................................................................................ 263
Modbus.................................................................................. 263
Mounting (e.g. E70381) ......................................................... 180
MRAM.................................................................................... 263
MSB....................................................................................... 263

N
Navigation trail......................................................................... 55
Number of AS-i voltage failures on the AS-i master.............. 225
Number of configuration errors on the master....................... 227
Number of disturbed telegrams on the master (by noisy slaves)
.......................................................................................... 233

O
On this manual .......................................................................... 7
Online statistics (standard mode).......................................... 244
Online statistics without PC................................................... 246
Online support center (OSC)................................................. 241
Opening / uninstalling the device .................................. 122, 143
Operating and display elements........................................ 33, 50
Operating conditions, installation . 30, 43, 67, 71, 73, 75, 89, 91,
103, 116, 131, 137, 148, 152, 158
Operating modes ................................................................... 197
Operating system .................................................................. 263
OSC....................................................................................... 263
OSSD .................................................................................... 263
Output response ................................................................ 72, 74
Overview of the ifm AS-i device families ................................. 24
Overview of the operating modes.......................................... 198

270

P
Parameter setting (AC2216, AC2217)..................................... 80
Parameter setting (AC2218, AC2219)..................................... 85
Parameter setting (AC2220).................................................... 82
Parameter setting (AC2516, AC2517, AC2526, AC2566) .... 109
Parameter setting (AC2518, AC2519, AC2521, AC2568) .... 113
Parameter setting (AC2520, AC2570)................................... 111
Parameter setting (AC2616, AC2617)..................................... 95
Parameter setting (AC2618, AC2619)................................... 100
Parameter setting (AC2620).................................................... 97
Parameter setting (AC2916, AC2923)................................... 163
Parameter setting (AC5222, AC5223)................................... 127
Password............................................................................... 263
PCCD..................................................................................... 264
PCD ....................................................................................... 264
PDM....................................................................................... 264
PELV...................................................................................... 264
Pictogram .............................................................................. 264
PLC configuration .................................................................. 264
PLC Setup ............................................................................... 38
Pneumatics.................................................................... 133, 145
Polling.................................................................................... 264
Power supply concepts............................................................ 44
Power supply for 8 A ............................................................... 69
Power-on delay time.............................................................. 264
Preface ...................................................................................... 7
Pressure dew point........................................................ 135, 146
Process image....................................................................... 265
Profibus ................................................................................. 265
Profibus settings ...................................................................... 60
Profinet .................................................................................. 265
Profinet settings....................................................................... 61
Project all................................................................................. 58
Purity of compressed air (specification) ........................ 134, 146

Q
Quick setup.............................................................................. 57
Quick Setup ............................................................................. 38

R
Read and write data .............................................................. 204
Read and write ID code 1...................................................... 203
Read and write parameters ................................................... 205
Read ID code or ID code 2.................................................... 202
Read IO code ........................................................................ 203
Read periphery fault flags...................................................... 205
Redundant ............................................................................. 265
Remanent .............................................................................. 266
Repeater................................................................................ 182
Reset error counter................................................................ 236
Resistance to environmental influences................ 15, 17, 19, 21
RTC ....................................................................................... 266
RTS........................................................................................ 266
RTS errors error codes R01...R43 ..................................... 216

S
Safety data ............................................................................ 250
Safety instructions ................................................................... 11
SD card.................................................................................. 266
Sealing materials and plastics used for the AirBox ....... 135, 147
Sealing the AS-i flat cable end ................................................ 23
Self-test ................................................................................. 266
SELV...................................................................................... 266

ifm AS-Interface manual tips and tricks for users edition 2.1

2012-09-26

Notes

Set operating mode ................................................................. 59

Set the configuration interface................................................. 63
Setting slave parameters via the device display in the AS-i
master................................................................................. 42
Set-up tuner........................................................................... 190
Show / delete error counter ................................................... 238
Show error messages of the slaves ...................................... 239
Show evaluation of the voltage supply .................................. 239
Show performance of the AS-i master .................................. 240
Single slave ........................................................................... 266
Slave...................................................................................... 266
Slave configuration ................................................................ 266
Slave Info................................................................................. 40
Slave Lists ............................................................................... 38
Slave Setup ............................................................................. 40
Splitter (E70354, E70377) ..................................................... 167
Splitter (E70454).................................................................... 169
Structure of the addressing unit ............................................ 195
Structure of the operating modes .......................................... 199
Subnavigation bars.................................................................. 56
Supply concept 1 ..................................................................... 45
Supply concept 2 ..................................................................... 46
Supply concept 3 ..................................................................... 47
Switch language ...................................................................... 52
Switching of vacuum with 4/2-way valve ............................... 134
Symbols................................................................................. 266
Symbols in the subnavigation bars.......................................... 56
Symmetrical and asymmetrical earth faults........................... 252
System description .................................................................. 13
System Info.............................................................................. 40
System Setup .......................................................................... 40
System variable ..................................................................... 267

T
Tampering with the unit ........................................................... 12
Target .................................................................................... 267
TCP........................................................................................ 267
Temperature characteristics.................................. 16, 18, 20, 22
Text/graphics display

Set contrast/brightness..................................................................37
Switch language ............................................................................36

Tightening torques................................................................. 149

Tightening torques for AC2471, AC2474, AC2477 ............... 154
Tightening torques for mounting set E70402 ........................ 155
Tightening torques, general................................................... 153
Troubleshooting ControllerE and gateways (AC13nn).......... 207
Tuner ..................................................................................... 183

U
UDP ....................................................................................... 267
Unit ID.................................................................................... 267
Unlocking / uninstalling the upper part .................................. 170
Use, intended ........................................................................ 267

W
Watchdog .............................................................................. 267
What do the symbols and formats mean?................................. 8
What does an insulation fault monitor do? ............................ 251
What is an earth fault?........................................................... 251
What is what in the text/graphics display? .............................. 34
What previous knowledge is required? ................................... 12
Wiring and LED behaviour AC2211 ...................................... 253
Wiring and LED behaviour AC2212 ...................................... 254

271

ifm AS-Interface manual tips and tricks for users edition 2.1

2012-09-26

Notes

272

273

274

275

276

ifm weltweit ifm worldwide

ifm lchelle internationale
8310

As on: 2010-10-08
http://www.ifm.com E-Mail: [email protected]
Service hotline: 0800 16 16 16 4 (only Germany, Mo...Fr, 07.00...18.00 o'clock)
ifm Niederlassungen Sales offices Agences
D

ifm electronic gmbh Vertrieb Deutschland

Niederlassung Nord 31135 Hildesheim Tel. 0 51 21 / 76 67-0
Niederlassung West 45128 Essen Tel. 02 01 / 3 64 75 -0
Niederlassung Mitte-West 58511 Ldenscheid Tel. 0 23 51 / 43 01-0
Niederlassung Sd-West 64646 Heppenheim Tel. 0 62 52 / 79 05-0
Niederlassung Baden-Wrttemberg 73230 Kirchheim Tel. 0 70 21 / 80 86-0
Niederlassung Bayern 82178 Puchheim Tel. 0 89 / 8 00 91-0
Niederlassung Ost 07639 Tautenhain Tel. 0 36 601 / 771-0
ifm electronic gmbh Friedrichstrae 1 45128 Essen

A
AUS
B, L
BR
CH
CN
CND
CZ
DK
E
F
FIN
GB, IRL
GR
H
I
IL
IND
J
MAL
MEX
N
NL
P
PL
RA, ROU
ROK
RP
RUS
S
SGP
SK
THA
TR
UA
USA
ZA

ifm electronic gmbh 1120 Wien Tel. +43 16 17 45 00

ifm efector pty ltd. Mulgrave Vic 3170 Tel. +61 3 00 365 088
ifm electronic N.V. 1731 Zellik Tel. +32 2 / 4 81 02 20
ifm electronic Ltda. 03337-000, Sao Paulo SP Tel. +55 11 / 2672-1730
ifm electronic ag 4 624 Hrkingen Tel. +41 62 / 388 80 30
ifm electronic Co. Ltd. 201210 Shanghai Tel. +86 21 / 5027 8559
ifm efector Canada inc. Oakville, Ontario L6K 3V3 Tel. +1 800-441-8246
ifm electronic spol. s.r.o. 25243 Prhonice Tel. +420 267 990 211
ifm electronic a/s 2605 BROENDBY Tel. +45 70 20 11 08
ifm electronic s.a. 08820 El Prat de Llobregat Tel. +34 93 479 30 80
ifm electronic s.a. 93192 Noisy-le-Grand Cedex Tl. +33 0820 22 30 01
ifm electronic oy 00440 Helsinki Tel . +358 75 329 5000
ifm electronic Ltd. Hampton, Middlesex TW12 2HD Tel. +44 208 / 213-0000
ifm electronic Monoprosopi E.P.E. 15125 Amaroussio Tel. +30 210 / 6180090
ifm electronic kft. 9028 Gyr Tel. +36 96 / 518-397
ifm electronic s.a. 20041 Agrate-Brianza (MI) Tel. +39 039 / 68.99.982
Astragal Ltd. Azur 58001 Tel. +972 3 -559 1660
ifm electronic India Branch Office Kolhapur, 416234 Tel. +91 231-267 27 70
efector co., ltd. Togane-shi, Chiba 283-0826 Tel. +81 475-50-3003
ifm electronic Pte. Ltd 80250 Johor Bahru Johor Tel. +60 7 / 331 5022
ifm efector S. de R. L. de C. V. Monterrey, N. L. 64630 Tel. +52 81 8040-3535
Sivilingenir J. F. Knudtzen A/S 1396 Billingstad Tel. +47 66 / 98 33 50
ifm electronic b.v. 3843 GA Harderwijk Tel. +31 341 / 438 438
ifm electronic s.a. 4430-208 Vila Nova de Gaia Tel. +351 223 / 71 71 08
ifm electronic Sp. z o.o. 40-524 Katowice Tel. +48 32-608 74 54
ifm electronic s.r.l. 1107 Buenos Aires Tel. +54 11 / 5353 3436
ifm electronic Ltd. 140-884 Seoul Tel. +82 2 / 790 5610
Gram Industrial, Inc. 1770 Mantilupa City Tel. +63 2 / 850 22 18
ifm electronic 105318 Moscow Tel. +7 495 921-44-14
ifm electronic a b 512 60 verlida Tel. +46 325 / 661 500
ifm electronic Pte. Ltd. Singapore 609 916 Tel. +65 6562 8661/2/3
ifm electronic s.r.o. 835 54 Bratislava Tel. +421 2 / 44 87 23 29
Sang Chai Meter Co., Ltd. Bangkok 10 400 Tel. +66 2 / 616 80 51
ifm electronic Ltd. Sti. 34381 Sisli/Istanbul Tel. +90 212 / 210 50 80
TOV ifm electronic 02660 Kiev Tel. +380 44 501 8543
ifm efector inc. Exton, PA 19341 Tel. +1 610 / 5 24-2000
ifm electronic (Pty) Ltd. 0157 Pretoria Tel. +27 12 345 44 49
Technische nderungen behalten wir uns ohne vorherige Ankndigung vor.
We reserve the right to make technical alterations without prior notice.
Nous nous rservons le droit de modifier les donnes techniques sans pravis.